A_qna -- Q Transition Manual (fundamentals)

Transcript

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controller Transition Manual (Fundamentals) A/QnA -> Q Art. no. 165344 01 10 2005 L(NA)-08043ENG Version C MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these instructions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this handbook and the relevant manuals introduced in this handbook carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION". DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage. Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances. Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety. Please save this handbook to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user. A-1 [Design Precautions] DANGER Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module. Otherwise, trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation. (1) Outside the PLC, construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emergency stop, protective circuits, positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward/ reverse operations. (2) When the PLC detects the following problems, it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of (a). In the case of (b), it will hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting. Note that the AnS series module will turn off the output in either of cases (a) and (b). (a) The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment. (b) The CPU module self-diagnosis functions, such as the watchdog timer error, detect problems. Q series module A series module Output OFF Output OFF Hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting. Output OFF In addition, all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect, such as in the I/O controller. Build a fail safe circuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operates safely at such times. Refer to "LOADING AND INSTALLATION" in this manual for example fail safe circuits. (3) Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor. So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble. A-2 [Design Precautions] DANGER When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short-circuited load flows in the output module for a long time, it may cause smoke or fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as fuse. Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLC main module power is turned on. If the external power supply is turned on first, it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation. When there are communication problems with the data link, refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station. Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation. When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the intelligent function module / special function module to exercise control (data change) on the running PLC, configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the whole system will always operate safely. Also before exercising other control (program change, operating status change (status control)) on the running PLC, read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety. Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device, an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault. In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program, corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU. CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or install them close to each other. They should be installed 100 mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other. Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation. When controlling items like lamp load, heater or solenoid valve using an output module, large current (approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances) may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON. Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current. A-3 [Installation Precautions] CAUTION Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this manual. Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock, fire, erroneous operation, and damage to or deterioration of the product. While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module, insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops. Then, securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point. Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction, failure or drop. When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration, tighten the module with a screw. Tighten the screw in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module. When installing extension cables, be sure that the base unit and the extension module connectors are installed correctly. After installation, check them for looseness. Poor connections could cause an input or output failure. Securely load the memory card into the memory card loading connector. After installation, check for lifting. Poor connections could cause an operation fault. Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module. Not doing so could result in damage to the product.Note that the module can be changed online (while power is on) in the system that uses the CPU module compatible with online module change or on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online(while power is on), and each module has its predetermined changing procedure. For details, refer to this manual and the online module change section in the manual of the module compatible with online module change. Do not directly touch the module's conductive parts or electronic components. Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module. A-4 [Wiring Precautions] DANGER Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system when installing or placing wiring. Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product. When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work, be sure that the module's terminal covers are correctly attached. Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock. [Wiring Precautions] CAUTION Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor. Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation. When wiring in the PLC, be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product's rated voltage and the terminal layout. Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage. External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools, or correctly soldered. Imperfect connections could result in short circuit, fires, or erroneous operation. Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque. If the terminal screws are loose, it could result in short circuits, fire, or erroneous operation. Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and/or the module, resulting in fallout, short circuits, or malfunction. Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module. Such debris could cause fires, damage, or erroneous operation. The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the module during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring. Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation. A-5 [Startup and Maintenance precautions] DANGER Do not touch the terminals while power is on. Doing so could cause shock or erroneous operation. Correctly connect the battery. Also, do not charge, disassemble, heat, place in fire, short circuit, or solder the battery. Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires. Switch off all phases of the externally supplied power used in the system when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws. Not doing so could result in electric shock. Undertightening of terminal screws can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening of screws can cause damages to the screws and/or the module, resulting in fallout, short circuits, or malfunction. A-6 [Startup and Maintenance precautions] CAUTION The online operations conducted for the CPU module being operated, connecting the peripheral device (especially, when changing data or operation status), shall be conducted after the manual has been carefully read and a sufficient check of safety has been conducted. Operation mistakes could cause damage or problems with of the module. Do not disassemble or modify the modules. Doing so could cause trouble, erroneous operation, injury, or fire. Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm (9.85 inch) away in all directions of the PLC. Not doing so can cause a malfunction. Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module. Not doing so could result in damage to the product. Note that the module can be changed online (while power is on) in the system that uses the CPU module compatible with online module change or on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online (while power is on), and each module has its predetermined changing procedure. For details, refer to this manual and the online module change section in the manual of the module compatible with online module change. Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit more than 50 times (IEC61131-2-compliant), after the first use of the product. Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector. Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the module. Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using. Before touching the module, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the module to fail or malfunction. [Disposal Precautions] CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. A-7 [Transportation Precautions] CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations. (Refer to QCPU User’s Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) for details of the controlled models.) A-8 REVISIONS * The handbook number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Print Date * Handbook Number Revision Mar., 2005 L(NA)-08043ENG-A First edition Apr., 2005 L(NA)-08043ENG-B Correction Section 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 7.2.1, Appendix 1 Addition Appendix 1.1 Changed item numbers Appendix 1.1 to Appendix 1.4 → Appendix 1.2 to Appendix 1.5 Oct., 2005 L(NA)-08043ENG-C Addition Appendix 1, Appendix 2 Partial correction Contents, Section1.1.2, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 5.1, 5.2.2, 7.4.1, 7.4.3, 7.5.1, 7.5.3, Appendix 1 Appendix 3 Japanese Handbook Version L-08042-C This handbook confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this handbook. 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION A-9 CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 1 REVISIONS••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 9 CONTENTS•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 10 CHAPTER 1 1.1 INTRODUCTION 1 - 1 to 1 - 5 Suggestions for Transition from Large-sized A/QnA Series to Q Series •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1 - 1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 Advantages of Transition to Q series ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1 - 1 Suggestions for Transition to Q series ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1 - 2 Precautions for Transition from Large-sized A/QnA Series to Q Series ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1 - 5 CHAPTER 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 - 1 to 2 - 17 2.1 List of Alternative CPU Module Models for Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2 - 1 2.2 CPU Module Specifications Comparisons •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2 - 5 2.3 CPU Module Functional Comparisons ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2 - 7 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 Functional Comparisons Between A2CCPU, AnNCPU and Q Series CPU •••••••••••••••••••••••2 - 7 Functional Comparisons Between AnACPU, AnUCPU and Q Series CPU ••••••••••••••••••••••••2 - 9 Functional Comparisons Between QnACPU and Q series CPU ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 11 Precautions for CPU Module Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 13 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 Memory for CPU Module •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 13 Keyword Registration and Password Registration •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 14 Write During RUN ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 15 No. of Base I/O Slots ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 16 Programming Tool and Connection Cable for Q Series CPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 17 CHAPTER 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 - 1 to 3 - 84 3.1 List of Alternative Models for I/O Module •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3 - 1 3.2 I/O Modules Specifications Comparisons Between •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 - 13 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.3 Specifications Comparisons Between Input Modules •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 - 13 Specifications Comparisons Between Output Module ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 - 40 Specifications Comparisons Between I/O Modules ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 - 76 Specifications Comparisons Interrupt Module ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 - 80 Blanking Module and Dummy Module Specifications Comparisons Between •••••••••••••••••• 3 - 82 Precautions for I/O Module Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 - 83 CHAPTER 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS 4 - 1 to 4 - 8 4.1 List of Alternative Models for Power Supply Module •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4 - 1 4.2 Power Supply Module Specifications Comparisons ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4 - 2 4.3 Precautions for Power Supply Module Replacement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4 - 8 A - 10 CHAPTER 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT 5 - 1 to 5 - 8 5.1 List of Alternative Models for Base Unit and Extension Cable ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 1 5.2 Base Unit and Extension Cable Specifications Comparisons •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 Precautions for Base Unit and Extension Cable Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 5 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 Base Unit Specifications Comparisons ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 2 Extension Cables Specifications Comparisons •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 4 Precautions for Base Unit Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 5 Precautions for Extension Cable Replacement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 5 QA65B Model Extension Base Unit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 6 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 System Configuration ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 6 List of Configurating Devices ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 7 External Dimensions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 8 CHAPTER 6 MEMORY AND BATTERY REPLACEMENT 6 - 1 to 6 - 3 6.1 List of Alternative Models for Memory •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6 - 1 6.2 Precautions for Memory and Battery Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6 - 2 CHAPTER 7 7.1 Replacing the ACPU with the QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 29 Replacing the QnACPU with the QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 29 Special Relay Replacement List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 30 Special Register Replacement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 36 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.6 Conversion from ACPU to QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 25 Conversion from QnACPU to QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 26 Special Relay Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 29 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.5 List of Instructions Conversion from A to QCPU (Sequence/Basic/Application Instructions) • 7 - 12 List of Instruction Conversion from A to QCPU (Dedicated Instructions) ••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 17 Instructions that May Need a Replacement at Instruction Conversion from ACPU to QCPU 7 - 20 Instruction Conversion from QnACPU to QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 24 Instructions that May Need a Replacement After Conversion from QnACPU to QCPU ••••••• 7 - 24 Precautions for Parameter Replacement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 25 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.4 Program Conversion Procedure from ACPU to QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 4 Change PLC Type Operation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 5 ACPU Program Conversion Ratio ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 7 Reading (Reusing) Other Format Files ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 9 Instruction Conversion ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 12 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.3 7 - 1 to 7- 55 Program Replacement Procedure ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 4 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.2 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT Replacing the ACPU with the QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 36 Replacing the QnACPU with the QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 36 Special Register Replacement List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 37 Precautions for Replacing the MELSAP-II with the MELSAP3 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 43 7.6.1 7.6.2 Starting SFC Program •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 43 Block Information (SFC Information Device) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 43 A - 11 7.7 Precautions for Program Replacement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 45 7.7.1 7.7.2 7.7.3 7.7.4 7.7.5 7.7.6 7.7.7 7.7.8 7.7.9 7.7.10 7.7.11 List of Applicable Devices ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 45 I/O Control Method •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 47 Usable Data Format for Instructions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 47 Timer ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 48 Counter •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 49 Display Instructions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 49 Instructions where Format is Changed (Excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU Dedicated Instructions) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 50 AnACPU/AnUCPU Dedicated Instruction •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 51 Setting Method when Multiple Sequence Programs are Created •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 52 Precautions for File Register Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 54 Boot Run Method (Writing Programs to ROM) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 55 CHAPTER 8 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 8 - 1 to 8 - 3 8.1 Q Series External Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8 - 1 8.2 Q Series External Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions when Mounted with the Upgrade Tool •8 - 2 8.3 A Series External Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8 - 3 APPENDICES App - 1 to App - 15 Appendix 1 Basic Model QCPU ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• App - 1 Appendix 1.1 Major Restrictions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• App - 1 Appendix 1.2 CPU Module Specifications Comparisons •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• App - 3 Appendix 1.3 CPU Module Functional Comparisons •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• App - 5 Appendix 2 Spare parts storage •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App - 11 Appendix 3 Related Manuals •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App - 12 Appendix 3.1 Appendix 3.2 Appendix 3.3 Appendix 3.4 Appendix 3.5 A - 12 Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook •••••••App - 12 A/QnA Series ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• App - 12 Q Series ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App - 13 Programming Tool •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App - 14 Related Catalog Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. •••••••••App - 14 1 INTRODUCTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Suggestions for Transition from Large-sized A/QnA Series to Q Series 1.1.1 Advantages of Transition to Q series (1) Advanced performance of equipments (Tact time reduction). The Q series includes faster operation processing speed, faster bus speed and dual processors of Super MSP (MELSEC SEQUENCE PROCESSOR) and general-purpose processor to provide approximately 5 times more efficient processing than the A series. This realizes more advanced performance of equipments. (2) Compact control panel and space saving As the Q series needs only 1/4 mounting area of the A series, it is possible to create more compact control panel. (3) Improved maintainability (a) The high-speed program ports (USB port and high-speed serial port) enable the program reading/writing time to be greatly reduced, resulting in improvement of on-site maintainability. (b) As standard ROM (Flush ROM) is built-in the Q series, ROM operation can be performed (Without Battery) without a memory card. (c) As large files can be managed, it is possible to store conventional programs as correction history in memory. 1-1 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1.2 Suggestions for Transition to Q series (1) Gradual transition to Q series without modifying the wiring Method: Replace the modules gradually by using the QA extension base (QA65B) and utilizing the property of the large-sized A series. Advantage: The cost and workload for the transition can be divided, and yet the function extension can be continued during the transition. Existing large- sized A Q series Q series Large- sized A modules Q series Remove the existing large-sized modules and mount them onto the QA extension base. Large- sized A modules QA extension base 1-2 1 INTRODUCTION Replacement procedures: Step 1 • Mount the QCPU and module for function extension (if necessary) on a Q series main base, and then connect it to the QA extension base (QA65B). Mount the existing large-sized A modules such as the power supply module and I/O module etc. on the extension base. (The existing wiring is usable without modification.) • Programs are automatically converted* by changing the PLC type from ACPU to QCPU using GX Developer. * Some instructions are not automatically converted. In case of intelligent function module or network module, programs and parameters need be changed. Step 2 Replace existing modules on the A base with the Q series modules sequentially, and remove the QA extension base (QA65B) when all the modules have been replaced. Existing large-sized A Step 1 Q series Q series Step 2 Replace all modules with the Q series Use the QA extension base (QA65B) The properties such as the existing large-sized A power supply, I/O modules, etc can be used. + The existing wiring is usable without modification. 1-3 1 INTRODUCTION (2) Transition to Q series by utilizing existing (terminal block) wiring Method: Use the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd and the existing mounting hole/terminal block wiring. Advantage: No need to process additional holes, and the existing wiring is usable. Existing large-sized A I/O CPU Power supply Power supply CPU Q series I/O Upgrade tool Remove the existing terminal block (with wiring) and mount it onto the renewal tool (Base adapter). 1-4 1 INTRODUCTION Replacement procedures: • Remove the existing large-sized A series together with the base, and use the existing mounting holes to mount the upgrade tool (Base adapter) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. Then mount the Q series. (By mounting the base adapter, it is not necessary to redo the mounting holes.) • Mount the upgrade tool (Conversion adapter) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. on the mounted Q series I/O modules. • Remove the terminal blocks wired from the existing large-sized A series I/O modules, and mount the blocks on the conversion adapter. (The existing wiring is usable.) • Programs are automatically converted* by changing the PLC type from ACPU to QCPU using GX Developer. Even if the module arrangement is changed, the I/O can be assigned to the same number as before, which cuts out the need to modify the programs and slot number for I/O module. * Some instructions are not automatically converted. In case of intelligent function module or network module, programs and parameters need be changed Existing large-sized A Q series Upgrade tool (Base adapter) Upgrade tool (Conversion adapter) Utilize the existing wiring of the I/O module. The upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd For products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., contact your local sales office. 1.1.3 Precautions for Transition from Large-sized A/QnA Series to Q Series (a) Be sure to confirm its functions, specifications and instructions by referring the manual of the corresponding Q series module prior to use. (b) Be sure to check the operation of whole system before the actual operation. 1-5 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.1 List of Alternative CPU Module Models for Replacement A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model A1NCPU Q02CPU A1NCPUP21 Q02CPU QJ71LP21-25 A1NCPUR21 Q02CPU QJ71BR11 A2NCPU Q02CPU A2NCPUP21 Q02CPU QJ71LP21-25 A2NCPUR21 Q02CPU QJ71BR11 A2NCPU-S1 Q02CPU A2NCPUP21-S1 Q02CPU QJ71LP21-25 A2NCPUR21-S1 Q02CPU QJ71BR11 A3NCPU Q06HCPU A3NCPUP21 Q06HCPU QJ71LP21-25 A3NCPUR21 Q06HCPU QJ71BR11 A2ACPU Q02CPU A2ACPUP21 Q02CPU QJ71LP21-25 A2ACPUR21 Q02CPU QJ71BR11 CPU module 2-1 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) I/O control: Refresh/Direct switching → Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): For refresh 1.0µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.2 → 4.4 I/O points: 256 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 6k steps → 28k steps File register points: 0 point → 1017k points Extension stage: 1 stage → 7 stage Applicable memory: 4KRAM/4KROM/4KEROM → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh/Direct switching → Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): For refresh 1.0µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value:0.2 → 4.4 I/O points: 512 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 4k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 3 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh/Direct switching → Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): For refresh 1.0µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.2 → 4.4 I/O points: 1024 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 4k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh/Direct switching → Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): For refresh 1.0µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 0.2 → 10.3 I/O points: 2048 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 30k × 2 steps → 60k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.2µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.9 → 4.4 I/O points: 512 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 3 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model A2ACPU-S1 Q02CPU A2ACPUP21-S1 Q02CPU QJ71LP21-25 A2ACPUR21-S1 Q02CPU QJ71BR11 A3ACPU Q06HCPU A3ACPUP21 Q06HCPU QJ71LP21-25 A3ACPUR21 Q06HCPU QJ71BR11 A2UCPU CPU module Q series alternative models A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A1NCPUP21-S3 Q02CPU Q02CPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q02CPU QJ71LP21G Remark (restrictions) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.2µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.9 → 4.4 I/O points: 1024 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.15µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 1.2 → 10.3 I/O points: 2048 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 30k × 2 steps → 60k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.2µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.9 → 4.4 I/O points: 512 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 3 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.2µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.9 → 4.4 I/O points: 1024 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.15µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 1.2 → 10.3 I/O points: 2048 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 30k × 2 steps → 60k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.15µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 1.2 → 10.3 I/O points: 4096 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 30k × 4 steps → 124k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** I/O control: Refresh/Direct switching → Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): For refresh 1.0µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.2 → 4.4 I/O points: 256 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 6k steps → 28k steps File register points: 0 point → 1017k points Extension stage: 1 stage → 7 stage Applicable memory: 4KRAM/4KROM/4KEROM → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 2-2 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model A2NCPUP21-S3 A2NCPUP21-S4 A3NCPUP21-S3 Q series alternative models Model Q02CPU QJ71LP21G Q02CPU QJ71LP21G Q06HCPU QJ71LP21G CPU module A2ACPUP21-S3 A2ACPUP21-S4 A3ACPUP21-S3 2-3 Q02CPU QJ71LP21G Q02CPU QJ71LP21G Q06HCPU QJ71LP21G Remark (restrictions) I/O control: Refresh/Direct switching → Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): For refresh 1.0µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value:0.2 → 4.4 I/O points: 512 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 4k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 3 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh/Direct switching → Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): For refresh 1.0µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.2 → 4.4 I/O points: 1024 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 4k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh/Direct switching → Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): For refresh 1.0µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 0.2 → 10.3 I/O points: 2048 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 30k × 2 steps → 60k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.2µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.9 → 4.4 I/O points: 512 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 3 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.2µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.9 → 4.4 I/O points: 1024 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 14k steps → 28k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.15µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 1.2 → 10.3 I/O points: 2048 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 30k × 2 steps → 60k steps File register points: 8k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Applicable memory: Depending on the memory cassette → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q series alternative models Model Q02CPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU CPU module Q4ACPU Q12HCPU A2CCPU Q02CPU QJ61BT11N A2CCPUP21 Q02CPU QJ61BT11N QJ71LP21-25 A2CCPUR21 Q02CPU QJ61BT11N QJ71BR11 A2CCPUC24-PRF Q02CPU QJ61BT11N QJ71C24N A2CCPUC24 Q02CPU QJ61BT11N QJ71C24N A2CJCPU-S3 Q02CPU QJ61BT11N Remark (restrictions) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.2µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 1.3 → 4.4 I/O points: 512 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 28k steps → 28k steps File register points: 1018k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 3 stages → 7 stages Number of memory cards: 2 cards → 1 card Max. memory card SRAM capacity: 2M bytes × 2 cards → 2M bytes × 1 card 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.2µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 1.3 → 10.3 I/O points: 1024 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 60k steps → 60k steps File register points: 1018k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Number of memory cards: 2 cards → 1 card Max. memory card SRAM capacity: 2M bytes × 2 cards → 2M bytes × 1 card 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.15µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 1.8 → 10.3 I/O points: 2048 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 92k steps → 124k steps File register points: 1018k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Number of memory cards: 2 cards → 1 card Max. memory card SRAM capacity: 2M bytes × 2 cards → 2M bytes × 1 card 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 0.075µs → 0.034µs PC MIX value: 3.8 → 10.3 I/O points: 4096 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 124k steps → 124k steps File register points: 1018k points → 1017k points Extension stage: 7 stages → 7 stages Number of memory cards: 2 cards → 1 card Max. memory card SRAM capacity: 2M bytes × 2 cards → 2M bytes × 1 card 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) I/O control: Refresh only Processing speed (LD instruction): 1.25µs → 0.079µs PC MIX value: 0.1 → 4.4 I/O points: 512 points → 4096 points Program capacity: 8k steps → 28k steps File register points: 4k points → 1017k points Remote I/O: MINI-S3 → CC-Link Applicable memory: built-in RAM/4KROM/8KROM/16KROM → built-in RAM/built-in flash ROM/memory card Q2MEM-** 9) Micro computer program: Available → Not available 2-4 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.2 CPU Module Specifications Comparisons : Usable r: Partially different in spec. (eg. setting method) A/QnA series Precaution for replacement Reference section Repetitive operation of stored program – – I/O control method Refresh mode/ Direct mode Use direct I/O instructions to input/output in the direct mode, as the Q series supports the refresh mode only. Section 7.7.2 Programming language Language dedicated to sequence control (Relay symbol, Logic symbol, MELSAP language) The MELSAP language for QnA/ Q series is MELSAP3 and that for A series is MELSAP- II. Section 7.6 Processing speed Sequence instractions (µs/step) 1.25 1.0 0.15 0.15 0.075 0.034 0.034 – – Watchdog timer (WDT) Watchdog timer (WDT) (ms) 10 to 2000 10 to 2000 200 200 5 to 2000 10 to 2000 10 to 2000 – – Max. 2M (SRAM card) Max. 2M (SRAM card) A memory cassette is required for the A series as user memory, while the user memory is included in the Q series as standard equipment. Section 2.4.1 Max. 252k Max. 252k – – – – Function Control method Memory capacity Contents User memory capacity (bytes) Sequence program (steps) Program capacitiy Number of occupied I/O points *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 2-5 ×: Not usable Q series High Process A2CCPU AnNCPU AnACPU AnUCPU QnACPU Performance *2 model *1 *3 *4 *4 *4 32k (Built-in RAM) Max. 448k (Memory casette) Max. 768k (Memory casette) Max. 1024k (Memory casette) Max. 2036k ×2 (SRAM card) Max. 8k Max. 30k × 2 Max. 30k × 2 Max. 30k × 4 Max. 124k *4 *4 Microcomputer program (bytes) Max. 14k Max. 58k × × × × × The AnA, AnU, QnA and Q series do not include microcomputer program. Therefore, consider use of sequence program, etc as the substitution. Number of I/O points (points) *5 512 256 to 2048 512 to 2048 512 to 4096 512 to 4096 4096 4096 – “High Performance model” is the generic term of Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU. “Process” is the generic term of Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU. Direct I/O is also selectable with the I/O control method setting switch. Basically, only the refresh mode is applicable, but some instructions/devices can be input/output in the direct mode. This number means the number of applicable points for the access to actual I/O modules. 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT : Usable r: Partially different in spec. (eg. setting method) A/QnA series Function Contents Input device (X) (points) *6 Output device (Y) (points) *6 Internal relay (M) (points) Latch relay (L) (points) Q series High Process A2CCPU AnNCPU AnACPU AnUCPU QnACPU Performance *2 model *1 256 to 512 to 512 8192 8192 8192 8192 2048 2048 256 to 512 to 512 8192 8192 8192 8192 2048 2048 ×: Not usable Total 2048 Total 2048 Total 8192 Total 8192 Step relay (S) (points) No. of device points Annunciator (F) (points) Edge relay (V) (points) Link relay (B) (points) Timer (T) (points) Counter (C) (points) Data register (D) (points) Link register (W) (points) File register (R) (points) Reference section – – – – 8192 8192 8192 – – 8192 8192 8192 – – 8192 *7 8192 *7 8192 *7 – – 256 256 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 – – × × × × 2048 2048 2048 – – 1024 1024 4096 8192 8192 8192 8192 – – 256 256 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 – – 256 256 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 – – 1024 1024 6144 8192 12288 12288 12288 – – 1024 1024 4096 8192 8192 8192 8192 – – 4096 8192 8192 8192 32768 32768 32768 – – Section 7.7.7 2 2 2 2 × × × Accumulators are converted to the special registers (SD718, SD719) upon A → Q program conversion as they are not included in the QnA and Q series. (Z) (points) 1 1 7 7 16 16 16 – – (V) (points) 1 1 7 7 × × × This is used as edge relay for the QnA and Q series – 8 8 8 8 15 15 15 – – 256 256 256 256 4096 4096 4096 – – 256 256 256 256 2048 2048 2048 – – 256 256 256 256 2048 2048 2048 – – Max. 1600 Max. 4032 Max. 4032 Max. 4032 Max. approx. 50k Max. approx. 50k Max. approx. 50k – – Accumulater (A) (points) Index register Precaution for replacement Nesting (N) (points) Pointer (P) (points) Special relay (M) (points) Special register (D) (points) Comment Points Comment points (points) *8 Self-diagnostics Watchdog timer (WDT), Memory error detection, CPU error detection, Battery error detection – – Stop/Continue setting – – Re-output operation status before STOP/Selection of output after operation execution – – Operation mode at error occurrence Output mode switching at changing from STOP to RUN *1 *2 *6 *7 *8 “High Performance model” is the generic term of the Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU. “Process” is the generic term of the Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU. This number means the number of usable points on the program. The step replays (S) of the QnA and Q series are dedicated to the SFC. Comment points are the points that can be written to CPU. 2-6 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.3 CPU Module Functional Comparisons 2.3.1 Functional Comparisons Between A2CCPU, AnNCPU and Q Series CPU : Usable r: Partially different in spec. (eg. setting method) A series Control Function *1 *2 *3 2-7 Contents A2CCPU ×: Not usable Q series AnNCPU Reference High Precaution for replacement section Performance Process *2 model *1 Set this function with the special register (D9020) for A series, and with parameters for Q series. – Holds the data of devices in the event of power OFF, resetting, and a momentary power failure longer than the allowable momentary power failure period. – – Remote RUN/STOP Executes the remote RUN/ STOP using external switches and peripheral devices. – – PAUSE Stops operations while holding the output status. Set the PAUSE enable flag with the special relay (M9040) for A series, and with the special relay (SM206) for Q series. Section 7.4.3 Interrupt processing Executes the program that corresponds to the cause when an interrupt cause occurs. r For A series, an interrupt program is required for each main program and subprogram separately. For Q series, create only one interrupt program to share between the two programs. Section 7.7.9 Microcomputer mode Executes various controls and operations over utility programs and user created microcomputer programs stored in the microcomputer program area by calling them from the sequence program. × Consider use of sequence program, etc., as the substitution. The Q series does not include the instructions by a utility package. Therefore, modify the corresponding instructions of QCPU and substitute them. – Display priority of ERROR LED The settings for ON/OFF of ERROR LED at the occurrence of error. Target errors vary by model, but there is no functional difference. – Constant scan Executes the sequence program at constant time intervals regardless of the processing time of the program. Latch (power backup) ROM operation Enables operation with parameters and programs stored in ROMs in order not to lose user programs due to battery exhaustion. Data protection function (System protect, Keyword registration/ Password registration) Prohibits peripheral devices from reading/writing to programs and comments in the memory cassettes, the memory card, and built-in memory, etc. of a CPU module. The settings of output status at changing from STOP to RUN The settings for the output status at changing from STOP to RUN (Y) between “re-output operation status before STOP” and “output after operation execution”. r r × r × r r r When performing ROM operation in the Q series, use the boot run function to read the sequence programs stored in the standard ROM built in the CPU or memory card into the program memory built in the CPU. Section 7.7.11 r The Q series prohibits each file from being read/written by password registration, whereas the A series prohibits the parameters and programs from being read/ written to the user memory by keyword registration. Section 2.4.2 In case of transition from the A series, it is necessary to re-set the parameters. – “High Performance model” is the generic term of Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU. “Process” is the generic term of Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU. Device numbers are converted upon the PLC type change by GX Developer. (Refer to Section 7.4) CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT : Usable r: Partially different in spec. (eg. setting method) A series Debug Control Function Maintenance 2 *1 *2 *4 *5 *6 *7 Contents A2CCPU ×: Not usable Q series AnNCPU Reference High Precaution for replacement section Performance Process *2 model *1 r The Q series handles the four digits of the year (western calendar), whereas the A series handles only the last two digits. – *5 *5 For the Q series, it is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. Section 2.4.3 Clock function A CPU includes a clock, of which data can be read and written. The clock data consists of year, month, date, hour, minute, second and a day of the week. Write during RUN Changes (writes to) the program of a CPU in the RUN mode. Status latch Stores the data of all devices in the memory cassette or memory card at the occurrence of an error for monitoring by the peripheral device. *6 × × The Q series does not include the status latch function. – Sampling trace Stores the data of specified devices at the specified intervals for monitoring by the peripheral device. *6 *7 *7 The SRAM card is required to execute the sampling trace in the Q series. – Step operation Stops the execution of a sequence program at the specified step. × × The Q series does not include the step operation function. Consider the debug with GX Simulator. – Off-line switch Skips the devices used for OUT instruction in the operation processing of sequence program. × × The Q series does not include the off-line switch function. – Online I/O module replacement Enables I/O modules to be replaced while the CPU is in RUN Replace I/O module while CPU is in RUN. (Only supported for Process CPU) – Selfdiagnostics function Executes self-diagnostics to check for errors and stop a CPU, etc. Error codes differ between the A series and Q series. – *4 × × r × “High Performance model” is the generic term of Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU. “Process” is the generic term of Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU. Only A2CCPUC24 (-PRF) is applicable. A2CJCPU-S3 and A2CCPU (P21/R21) are not. It is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. (Default-set to 500 steps.) The A1NCPU (P21/R21) is not applicable. The SRAM card is required. 2-8 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.3.2 Functional Comparisons Between AnACPU, AnUCPU and Q Series CPU : Usable r: Partially different in spec. (eg. setting method) A series Function Control 2-9 AnACPU AnUCPU Q series High Performance Process *2 model *1 Precaution for replacement Reference section Set this function with the special register (D9020) for A series, and with parameters for Q series. – Constant scan Executes the sequence program at constant time intervals regardless of the processing time of the program. Latch (power backup) Holds the data of devices in the event of power OFF, resetting, and a momentary power failure longer than the allowable momentary power failure period. – – Remote RUN/ STOP Executes the remote RUN/ STOP using external switches and peripheral devices. – – r r Stops operations while holding the output status. Set the PAUSE enable flag with the special relay (M9040) for A series, and with the special relay (SM206) for Q series. Section 7.4.3 Interrupt processing Executes the program that corresponds to the cause when an interrupt cause occurs. For A series, an interrupt program is required for each main program and sub-program separately. For Q series, create only one interrupt program to share between the two programs. Section 7.7.9 Display priority of ERROR LED The settings for ON/OFF of ERROR LED at the occurrence of error. Target errors vary by model, but there is no functional difference. ROM operation Enables operation with parameters and programs stored in ROMs in order not to lose user programs due to battery exhaustion. r When performing ROM operation in the Q series, use the boot run function to read the sequence programs stored in the standard ROM built in the CPU or memory card into the program memory built in the CPU. Section 7.7.11 Data protection function (System protect, Keyword registration/ Password registration) Prohibits peripheral devices from reading/writing to programs and comments in the memory cassettes, the memory card, and built-in memory, etc. of a CPU module. r The Q series prohibits each file from being read/written by password registration, whereas the A series prohibits the parameters and programs from being read/written to the user memory by keyword registration. Section 2.4.2 The settings of output status at changing from STOP to RUN The settings for the output status at changing from STOP to RUN (Y) between “re-output operation status before STOP” and “output after operation execution”. In case of transition from the A series, it is necessary to re-set the parameters. – Clock function A CPU includes a clock, of which data can be read/ written. The clock data consists of year, month, date, hour, minute, second and a day of the week. The Q series handles the four digits of the year (western calendar), whereas the A series handles only the last two digits. – PAUSE *1 *2 *3 Contents ×: Not usable r r r r r r “High Performance model” is the generic term of Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU. “Process” is the generic term of Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU. Device numbers are converted upon the PLC type change by GX Developer. (Refer to Section 7.4) – CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT : Usable r: Partially different in spec. (eg. setting method) A series Function *1 *2 *4 *5 Contents AnACPU AnUCPU ×: Not usable Q series High Performance Process *2 model *1 Precaution for replacement Reference section Section 2.4.3 Write during RUN Changes (writes to) the program of a CPU in the RUN mode. *4 *4 For the Q series, it is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. Status latch Stores the data of all devices in the memory cassette or memory card at the occurrence of an error for monitoring by the peripheral device. × × The Q series does not include the status latch function. – Sampling trace Stores the data of specified devices at the specified intervals for monitoring by the peripheral device. *5 *5 The SRAM card is required to execute the sampling trace in the Q series. – Step operation Stops the execution of a sequence program at the specified step. × × The Q series does not include the step operation function. Consider the debug with GX Simulator. – Online I/O module replacement Enables I/O modules to be replaced while the CPU is in RUN × Replace I/O module while CPU is in RUN. (Only supported for Process CPU) – Selfdiagnostics function Executes self-diagnostics to check for errors and stop a CPU, etc. Error codes differ between the A series and Q series. – Error history Stores errors detected by the diagnostics function into the CPU. Error details can be monitored from peripheral devices. The Q series can store error history data in a memory card (up to 100 errors) as well as in the built-in memory. – Debug Maintenance 2 “High Performance model” is the generic term of Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU. “Process” is the generic term of Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU. It is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. (Default-set to 500 steps.) The SRAM card is required. 2 - 10 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.3.3 Functional Comparisons Between QnACPU and Q series CPU : Usable r: Partially different in spec. (eg. setting method) QnA series Function Contents QnACPU Constant scan Latch (power backup) Remote RUN/ STOP PAUSE Interrupt processing Display priority of ERROR LED File management Control Structured program I/O assignment Boot run (ROM operation) Executes the sequence program after reading it from the memory card to the CPU built-in memory when the CPU goes to RUN mode. Data protection (System protect, Keyword registration/ Password registration) Prohibits peripheral devices to read/write the programs and comments in the CPU built-in memory, memory cassette, or memory card. Initial device value Output status setting at changing from STOP to RUN *1 *2 2 - 11 Q series Precaution for replacement High Performance Process *2 model *1 Executes the sequence program at the constant time intervals regardless of the processing time of the program. Holds the data of devices in the event of power OFF, resetting, and a momentary power failure longer than the allowable momentary power failure period. Executes the remote RUN/STOP using external switches and peripheral devices. Stops operations while holding the output status. Executes the program that corresponds to the cause when an interrupt cause occurs. The settings for ON/OFF of ERROR LED at the occurrence of error. Manages all of parameters, sequence programs, device comments, file registers, etc as files. Selects a suitable execution type for program application, and divides each program by designer, process or others. Performs the I/O assignment to any individual module regardless of its mounted position. ×: Not usable – – – – – – – – – – Target errors vary by model, but there is no functional difference. Memory configuration and data to be stored differ between the QnA series and Q series. – r r r r Sets an initial value of device memory, file registers, and special function modules, etc. when the CPU has become RUN status. Sets the output (Y) status at the change from STOP to RUN to reoutputting data before STOP or outputting data after the operation execution. Reference section When using a base unit with other than 8 slots, set the number of slots with the parameter (I/O assignment setting). Memory configuration and data to be stored differ between the QnA series and Q series. The Q series provides read/ write protection for each file with password registration. The QnA series prohibits parameters/programs read/ write from/to the user memory with keyword registration. Memory configuration and data to be stored differ between the QnA series and Q series. – Section 2.4.1 – Section 2.4.4 Section 2.4.1 Section 2.4.2 Section 2.4.1 Resetting parameters is required to replace the QnA series with the Q series. – – – Number of general data processing Sets the number of general data processing executed in one END operation. r r For the Q series use COM instructions or set the communication reserved time with special register (SD315) if necessary. Clock function A CPU incorporates a clock, which can be read/written. The clock data consists of year, month, day, hour, minute, second and a day of the week. r r The Q series uses 4-digit year of the western calendar while the QnA series uses the lower 2-digit year. “High performance model” is the generic term of Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU. “Process” is the generic term of Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU. CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT : Usable r: Partially different in spec. (eg. setting method) QnA series Function Contents Debug QnACPU Maintenance 2 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 ×: Not usable Q series Precaution for replacement High Performance Process *2 model *1 Reference section Write during RUN Changes (writes to) the program of a CPU in the RUN mode. *3 *3 *3 For the Q series, it is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. Status latch Stores the data of all devices in the memory cassette or memory card at the occurrence of an error for monitoring by the peripheral device. *5 × × The Q series does not include the status latch function. Sampling trace Stores the data of specified devices at the specified intervals for monitoring by the peripheral device. *4 *4 *4 Program trace Collects the execution status of specified programs and steps, and stores them in a file. × × The Q series does not incorporate the program trace function. – Simulation function Detaches I/O modules or special modules from the CPU module and test-operates the program upon the step operation. × × The Q series does not have the simulation function. Performing debugging with GX Simulator is recommended. – Step operation Stops the execution of a sequence program at the specified step. × × The Q series does not include the step operation function. Consider the debug with GX Simulator. – Execution time measurement (Program list monitor, scan time measurement) Measures the operation time for each program. – – Module access interval reading Monitors the access interval of special function modules or peripheral devices. – – Online I/O module replacement Enables I/O modules to be replaced while the CPU is in RUN. Replace I/O module while CPU is in RUN. (Only supported for Process CPU) – Selfdiagnostics Diagnoses wherher any error has occurred, detects errors and stop a CPU, etc. Error codes differ between the A series and Q series. – Error history Stores errors, which are detected with the diagnostics function, in a CPU or memory card. The stored history can be monitored with peripheral devices. *4 *5 *5 × – – Section 2.4.3 – – – “High performance model” is the generic term of Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU. “Process” is the generic term of Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU. It is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. (Default-set to 500 steps.) The SRAM card is required. SW IVD/NX-GPPQ is required. This is not applicable to GX Developer. 2 - 12 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.4 Precautions for CPU Module Replacement 2.4.1 Memory for CPU Module The memory configuration is shown in (1). Examine the following points depending on the memory capacity before replacement and applications. • Memory to store • To use or not use a memory card (1) Memory configuration and data that can be stored A series Memory cassette (RAM) Q series Program Parameter Comment File register RAM QnA series Program Parameter Comment Initial device value (Drive 0) Memory cassette (ROM) Program Parameter Standard RAM RAM Program Parameter Comment Initial device value (Drive 0) File register Local device (Drive 3) Replaceable with a standard ROM in the ROM operation Standard ROM Program Parameter Comment Initial device value (Drive 4) Memory card* (RAM) (Drive 1) Memory card* (ROM) Program, Parameter, Comment, Initial device value, File register, Local device, Error history Program, Parameter, Comment, Initial device value, File register (Drive 2) Memory card A (RAM) (Drive 1) Memory card A (ROM) Program, Parameter, Comment, Initial device value, File register, Local device, Error history Program, Parameter, Comment, Initial device value, File register (Drive 2) * Only one drive, drive 1 or drive2, can be used. Replaceable with a memory card (ROM) in the ROM operation Memory card B (RAM) (Drive 3) Memory card B (ROM) (Drive 4) 2 - 13 Program, Parameter, Comment, Initial device value, File register, Local device, Error history Program, Parameter, Comment, Initial device value, File register 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT (2) Capacity of each memory The following table shows the memory of CPU modules, in which the user program, etc. is stored, together with its capacity. Model Item A series QnA series Max. 1024k bytes – – Max. 32k bytes Max. 496k bytes Max. 1008k bytes (for A2CCPU only) (Program memory) (Program memory) – Max. 2M bytes Max. 2M bytes – Max. 512k bytes – Flash card – Max. 1M bytes Max. 4M bytes ATA card – – Max. 32M bytes Memory cassette Built-in RAM SRAM card Memory card EEPROM card Q series Standard RAM – – Max. 256k bytes Standard ROM – – Max. 1008k bytes 2.4.2 Keyword Registration and Password Registration The Q series prohibits reading from/writing to programs, etc. when a password is registered, as does the A/QnA series with keyword registration. Available functions are described below. Model Item A series QnA series Q series Batch password setting for all files provides the equivalent Either of the following The following attribute Prohibiting method for writing can be set to the specified to program, etc. memory. • Prohibition of read/write attributes can be set to the specified memory (drive). • Prohibition of read/write display • Prohibition of write function. (Supplement) By using a password, the following attributes can be set to each specified file of the specified memory (drive). • Prohibition of read/write display • Prohibition of write 2 - 14 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.4.3 Write During RUN To execute the write during RUN, it is necessary to, reserve the program capacity for increase upon the write during RUN in advance. (1) A series The program capacity is decided by the parameter (memory capacity setting), and can be increased within the capacity range upon the write during RUN. (2) QnA/Q series It is necessary to set the program capacity for increase upon the write during RUN at the PLC write. (This set capacity is called as the write during RUN reserved step. By default, 500 steps are reserved.) The following shows the setting screen for Allocate memory for Write during RUN as a reference. 2 - 15 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.4.4 No. of Base I/O Slots The following table indicates how the No. of base I/O slots is allocated for each series. Model Item A series QnA series Q series To use a base unit other than 8 slots, set the number of slots. No. of base I/O slots Fixed to 8 slots regardless of the actual number. (Supplement) Default follows the actual slot number. (Setting changeable with parameter) The following gives an example of replacing the A35B+A68B system (Default parameter is used) with the Q35B+Q68B system. (A series I/O assignment before replacement) A35B 4 X/Y10 X/Y20 X/Y30 X/Y40 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X/Y50 15 3 16 points 14 13 2 Power supply module 12 1 X/Y0 11 9 0 Q68B A68B 8 CPU module 16 points 10 Q35B Power supply module 16 points 16 points Empty 16 points 7 16 points 16 points 6 Empty X/Y20 3 16 points X/Y10 5 Empty 2 16 points 4 X/Y40 X/Y30 1 X/Y0 CPU module Power supply module 0 (Q series I/O assignment after replacing modules) 16 points X/Y80 16 points Power supply module When replacing modules, the first I/O number of the first extension stage becomes [X/Y50]. By setting the slot of a base unit, the first I/O number of the first extension stage can be changed to X/Y80. (Q series I/O assignment when the base I/O slots setting is made after replacing modules) Q35B 6 7 Empty Empty 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points 5 Empty 16 points 16 points X/Y20 9 4 X/Y40 X/Y10 8 3 X/Y30 2 16 points 1 X/Y0 CPU module Power supply module 0 12 13 14 Q68B 10 11 15 X/Y80 16 points Power supply module 2 - 16 2 CPU MODULE REPLACEMENT 2.4.5 Programming Tool and Connection Cable for Q Series CPU (1) Programming tool for Q series CPU The programming for the Q series CPU is performed with GX Developer. Note that the following programming software packages are not applicable. Compatible CPU ACPU QnACPU SW SW SW SW SW Software package model SRXV-GPPA IVD-GPPA NX-GPPA IVD-GPPQ NX-GPPQ (2) Connection cable for Q series CPU There are two connecting methods, the RS232 connection and USB connection, for the connection between the personal computer (which GX Developer is installed) and the Q series CPU. The connection availability for the CPU model is shown in the following table. Note that the RS232/RS422 conversion cable for the A/QnA series CPU are not applicable. CPU model Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25HCPU Q25PHCPU RS232 connection USB connection Unavailable Available*1 Available*2 *1 Applicable cable is the QC30R2. *2 Use the USB cable which conforms to the USB Standard Rev.1.1. Refer to GX Developer Operating Manual for details. 2 - 17 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3.1 List of Alternative Models for I/O Module A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model AX10 QX10 AX11 QX10 AX11EU QX10 AX20 QX28 Input module Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Not changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16 × 2) 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Not changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16 × 2) 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Not changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Not changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 3-1 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model AX21 QX28 AX21EU QX28 AX31 None AX31-S1 QX41 AX40 QX40 Input module 3-2 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (4 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (4 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Not changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed Alternating with QX41 is recommended. [When applying DC input] 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX71. [When applying AC input] Convert the 12/24VAC to DC externally before inputting to QX41. 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Not changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX70. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Input module Model AX40-UL QX40 AX41 QX41 AX41-S1 QX41-S1 AX41-UL QX41 AX42 QX42 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX70. 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX71. 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX71. 1) External wiring: Not changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX72. 3-3 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Input module 3-4 Model AX42-S1 QX42-S1 AX50-S1 None AX60-S1 None AX70 QX70 AX71 QX71 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Not changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable ) Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed Alternating with QX40 is recommended. 1) External wiring: Changed Connect a 5.6kΩ (1/2W or more) resistor to the external signal wire serially. 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed Alternating with QX40 is recommended. 1) External wiring: Changed Connect a 20kΩ (2W or more) resistor to the external signal wire serially. 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (24VDC not applicable) Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (24VDC not applicable) Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model AX80 QX80 AX80E QX82-S1 AX81 QX81 AX81B None AX81-S1 QX81 Input module Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX70. 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX70. 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1:When 12VDC is required, use QX71. Alternating with QX81 is recommended. 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Not changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: The wire breakage detection function not provided 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX71. 3-5 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model AX81-S2 None AX81-S3 QX82-S1 AX82 QX82 Input module 3-6 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) Alternating with QX81 is recommended. 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) Connect a 5.6kΩ (1/2W or more) or 8.2kΩ (1W or more) resistor serially to the external signal wire at 48VDC or 60VDC, respectively. 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed (D sub " FCN connector) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) *1 Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed *1: When 12VDC is required, use QX72. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Output module Model AY10 QY10 AY10A QY18A AY11 QY10 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Changed (No varistor, relay not replaceable) 3-7 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Output module 3-8 Model AY11A QY18A AY11AEU QY18A AY11E QY10 AY11EEU QY10 AY11-UL QY10 AY13 QY10 AY13E QY10 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Changed (No varistor) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Changed (No varistor) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Changed (No fuse, no varistor) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Changed (No fuse, no varistor) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Changed (No varistor) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Changed (No fuse) 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model AY13EU QY10 AY15EU QY10 AY22 QY22 AY23 QY22 AY40 QY40P AY40A QY68A AY41 QY41P AY41-UL QY41P Output module Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed (However, contact life span is reduced to half.) 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Changed (Output 2A " 0.6A) 5) Functions: Changed (No fuse, no varistor) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Changed (No fuse) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed Response: Slow 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Changed (28.8VDC or more not applicable) Rated output current: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 3-9 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model AY42 QY42P AY42-S1 QY42P AY42-S3 QY42P AY42-S4 QY42P AY50 QY50 AY51 QY50 AY51-S1 QY50 AY51-UL QY50 Output module 3 - 10 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Not changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Not changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed Response time: Changed (from 0.3ms to 1ms or less) 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Not changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Changed (The short protection function is equivalent to a fuse) 1) External wiring: Changed (External power supply is required) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Changed (Fuse not replaceable) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Changed (Fuse not replaceable) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (32=16×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model AY60 QY68A AY60E QY68A AY60S QY68A AY70 QY70 AY71 QY71 AY72 QY71 AY80 QY80 AY81 QY81P Output module Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Changed (48VDC not applicable) Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Changed (Fuse not replaceable, independent common) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Changed (48VDC not applicable) Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Changed (No fuse, independent common) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Changed (48VDC not applicable) Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Changed (No fuse, independent common) 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Not changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (64=32×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Changed (Fuse not replaceable) 1) External wiring: Changed (Connector terminal block must be converted.) 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Changed (Output 0.5A " 0.1A) 5) Functions: Not changed 3 - 11 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Model Output module AY82-EP QY81P I/O module AH42 QH42P Dynamic scan I/O module A42XY None Dummy module AG62 None Blanking module AG60 QG60 AI61 QI60 AI61-S1 QI60 Interrupt module 3 - 12 Q series alternative models Remark (restrictions) 1) External wiring: Not changed 2) Number of slots: Changed (2 modules required) 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Not changed (64=32×2) 4) Specifications Rated output voltage: Not changed Rated output current: Not changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Not changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed (32 points occupied) 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed Use both QX42 and QY42P and converting I/O signal from dynamic to static. [Dummy module function] Alternating with QG60 and I/O assignment setting is recommended. [Simulation switch function] Alternating with QX40 and external switch is recommended. No restrictions 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed (16 points occupied) 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Changed (12VDC not applicable) Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 1) External wiring: Changed 2) Number of slots: Not changed 3) Program Number of occupied I/O points: Changed (16 points occupied) 4) Specifications Rated input voltage: Not changed Rated input current: Changed ON voltage/ON current: Changed OFF voltage/OFF current: Changed Input resistance: Changed 5) Functions: Not changed 6) Others: The response time is different. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3.2 I/O Modules Specifications Comparisons Between 3.2.1 Specifications Comparisons Between Input Modules (1) Specifications comparisons between AX10 and QX10 Specification AX10 Number of input points 16 points 16 points Photocoupler 100-120VAC 50/60Hz 100-120VAC 50/60Hz Input voltage distortion Rated input current within 5% 10mA (100VAC 60Hz) Max. 300mA within 0.3ms Inrush current : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement Photocoupler Isolation method Rated input voltage QX10 within 5% Approx. 8mA (100VAC, 60Hz) Approx. 7mA (100VAC, 50Hz) (132VAC) Operating voltage range 85 to 132VAC 85 to 132VAC (50/60Hz ± 5%) (50/60Hz ± 3Hz) Maximum simultaneous 100% (16 points) simultaneously ON 80VAC or more/ ON voltage/ON current Input resistance Response time (50Hz, 60Hz) 30VAC or less/1.7mA or less 4mA or less (50Hz, 60Hz) Approx. 10kΩ (60Hz) Approx. 12kΩ (60Hz) Approx. 12kΩ (50Hz) Approx. 15kΩ (50Hz) 15ms or less ON to OFF 25ms or less Common terminal ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) (M3 × 6 screws) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Current consumption External dimensions 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screws) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch ) 0.39kg 0.17kg Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX10. *2 The following figure shows derating. *3 Increased.*1 × × Wiring change is required.*3 × cannot be used) *1 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 0 r R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm Weight Reduced.*1 20ms or less 16 points/common terminal block r (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) (common teminal: TB17) External connections derating figure. 15ms or less 16 points/common 20 points removable Use within the range shown in the (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) (common teminal: TB9,TB18) Operation indicator r 80VAC or more/5mA or more 6mA or more OFF to ON arrangement Refer to the derating chart. *2 40VAC or less/ OFF voltage/OFF current Reduced. *1 Max. 200mA within 1ms (132VAC) on input point r r Wiring space is narrower. 120VAC 132VAC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX10) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 13 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (2) Specifications comparisons between AX11 and QX10 : Compatible, Specification Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage Input voltage distortion Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Use two QX10s when using 17 Photocoupler Photocoupler 100-120VAC 50/60Hz 100-120VAC 50/60Hz r Reduced. *1 r Reduced. *1 r Increased. *1 10mA (100VAC 60Hz) Approx. 7mA (100VAC, 50Hz) (132VAC) Operating voltage range 85 to 132VAC (50/60Hz ± 5%) (50/60Hz ± 3Hz) Maximum simultaneous 60% (20 points) simultaneously ON OFF voltage/OFF current 80VAC or more/6mA or more 40VAC or less/4mA or less Input resistance Response time 32 points/common (common terminal: TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) ON indiction (LED) 38 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screws) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Current consumption 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) External dimensions mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) Weight (50Hz, 60Hz) Approx. 15kΩ (50Hz) 25ms or less External connections (50Hz, 60Hz) 30VAC or less/1.7mA or less Approx. 12kΩ (60Hz) ON to OFF Operation indicator 80VAC or more/5mA or more Approx. 10kΩ (60Hz) 15ms or less arrangement Refer to the derating chart*2 Approx. 12kΩ (50Hz) OFF to ON Common terminal 0.49kg 15ms or less (AC100V 50Hz, 60Hz) 20ms or less (AC100V 50Hz, 60Hz) 16 points/common (common terminal:TB17) ON indiction (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screws) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) *2 The following figure shows derating. 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature Wiring change is required. × 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX10. 132VAC × cannot be used) 0.17kg 120VAC × R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals *1 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 0 points or more. Max. 200mA within 1ms 85 to 132VAC ON voltage/ON current 3 - 14 Approx. 8mA (100VAC, 60Hz), (132VAC) on input point Precautions for replacement within 5% Max. 300mA within 0.3ms Inrush current ×: Incompatible QX10 within 5% Rated input current r: Partial change required, AX11 r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (3) Spacifications comparisons between AX11EU and QX10 :Compatible, Specification Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage Input voltage distortion Rated input current Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Use two QX10s when using 17 Photocoupler Photocoupler 100-120VAC 50/60Hz 100-120VAC 50/60Hz r Reduced. *1 r Reduced. *1 r Increased. *1 Within 5% 12mA (120VAC 60Hz) Approx. 7mA (100VAC, 50Hz) (132VAC) Operating voltage range 85 to 132VAC (50/60Hz ± 5%) (50/60Hz ± 3Hz) Maximum simultaneous 60% (20 points) simultaneously ON OFF voltage/OFF current input resistance Response time OFF to ON ON to OFF Common terminal arrangement 79VAC or more/6mA or more 40VAC or less/4mA or less Applicable crimping terminal (50Hz, 60Hz) 30VAC or less/1.7mA or less (50Hz, 60Hz) Approx. 12kΩ (60Hz) Approx. 15kΩ (50Hz) 15ms or less 15ms or less (100VAC 60Hz) (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 25ms or less 20ms or less (100VAC 60Hz) (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 32 points/common (common terminal: ON indication (LED) terminal block (M3.5 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size 80VAC or more/5mA or more Approx. 12kΩ (50Hz) 38 points removable External connections Refer to derating chart*2 Approx. 10kΩ (60Hz) TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) Operation indicator points or more. Max. 200mA within 1ms 85 to 132 VAC ON voltage/ON current Precautions for replacement Within 5% Approx. 8mA (100VAC, 60Hz). (132VAC) on input point ×: Incompatible QX10 Max. 300mA within 1ms Inrush current r: Partial change required, AX11EU 16 points/common (common terminal:TB17) ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (AWG14 to AWG19) (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) RAV1.25-3.5,RAV2-3.5 (sleeved crimping terminals × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 × cannot be used) Current consumption 0.15A (TYP.all points ON) 0.05A (TYP.all points ON) Dielectric withstand voltage (Across external circuit and internal 1780VAC rms/3cycles 1780VAC rms/3cycles (altitude 2,000m (6557.38ft.) ) (altitude 2,000m (6557.38ft.) ) 10MΩ or more by insulation 10MΩ or more by insulation circuit) Insulation vesistance resistance tester resistance tester By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width Noise durability IEC801-4 : 1kV and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency First transient noise IEC610004-4: 1kV External dimensions Weight 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.50kg 0.17kg *1 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX10. *2 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 0 r Wiring space is narrower. 120VAC 132VAC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature 3 - 15 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (4) Specifications comparisons between AX20 and QX28 : Compatible, Specification AX20 Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage Input voltage distortion 16 points Compatibility 8 points × (16 points occupied) Photocoupler Photocoupler 200-240VAC 50/60Hz 100-240VAC 50/60Hz Within 5% r: Partial change required, QX28 ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QX28s when using 9 points or more. Within 5% Approx. 17mA (200VAC, 60Hz), Rated input current 10mA (200VAC 60Hz) Approx. 14mA (200VAC, 50Hz), Approx. 8mA (100VAC, 60Hz), Approx. 7mA (100VAC, 50Hz) Max. 600mA within 0.12ms Inrush current Max. 500mA within 1ms (264VAC) (264VAC) Operating voltage range 170 to 264VAC 85 to 264VAC (50/60Hz ± 5%) (50/60Hz ± 3Hz) Maximum simultaneous 100% (16 points) on input point simultaneously ON ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current Input resistance Response time 160VAC or more/ 70VAC or less/3.5mA or less Approx. 12kΩ (60Hz) , Approx. 15kΩ (50Hz) 25ms or less arrangement Operation indicator 20ms or less 8 points/common ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) (M3 × 6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Reduced. *2 (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) (common teminal:TB17) Applicable wire size r 10ms or less 16 points/common terminal block derating figure. (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) (common teminal:TB9,TB18) 20 points removable External connections (50Hz, 60Hz) Approx. 24kΩ (50Hz) ON to OFF Use within the range shown in the (50Hz, 60Hz) 30VAC or less/1.7mA or less Approx. 22kΩ (60Hz), 15ms or less r 80VAC or more/5mA or more 5.5mA or more OFF to ON Common terminal Refer to the derating chart. *1 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) Review current capacity when Current consumption 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch ) r 0.38kg 0.20kg r r using 2 QX28s or more since current consumption is increased in that use. External dimensions Wiring space is narrower. Calculate weight carefully when Weight using 2 QX28s or more since the weight is increased in that use. *1 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *2 3 - 16 100% 45 100% 55 87.5%55 240V 264V 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX28. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (5) Specifications comparisons between AX21 and QX28 : Compatible, Specification AX21 Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage 32 points Compatibility 8 points × (16 points occupied) Photocoupler Photocoupler 200-240VAC 50/60Hz 100-240VAC 50/60Hz Input voltage distortion within 5% r: Partial change required, QX28 ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use the appropriate number of QX28s when using 9 points or more. within 5% Approx. 17mA (200VAC, 60Hz), Rated input current 10mA (220VAC 60Hz) Approx. 14mA (200VAC, 50Hz), Approx. 8mA (100VAC, 60Hz), Approx. 7mA (100VAC, 50Hz) Max. 600mA within 0.12ms Inrush current Max. 500mA within 1ms (264VAC) (264VAC) Operating voltage range 170 to 264VAC 85 to 264VAC (50/60Hz ± 5%) (50/60Hz ± 3Hz) Maximum simultaneous 60% (20 points) on input point simultaneously ON ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current input resistance Response time 160VAC or more/ 70VAC or less/3.5mA or less Approx. 12kΩ (60Hz), Approx. 15kΩ (50Hz) 25ms or less 32 points/common (common teminal: TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) ON indication (LED) 38 points removable External connections (50Hz, 60Hz) Approx. 24kΩ (50Hz) ON to OFF Operation indicator (50Hz, 60Hz) 30VAC or less/1.7mA or less Approx. 22kΩ (60Hz), 15ms or less arrangement 80VAC or more/5mA or more 5.5mA or more OFF to ON Common terminal Refer to the derating chart. *1 terminal block 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Reduced. *2 10ms or less (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 20ms or less (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 8 points/common (common teminal:TB17) ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size r 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) Review current capacity when Current consumption 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch ) r 0.50kg 0.20kg r r using 3 QX28s or more since current consumption is increased in that use. External dimensions Wiring space is narrower. Calculate weight carefully when Weight using 3 QX28s or more since the weight is increased in that use. *1 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *2 100% 45 100% 55 87.5%55 240V 264V 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX28. 3 - 17 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (6) Specifications comparisons between AX21EU and QX28 : Compatible, Specification AX21EU Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage 32 points Compatibility 8 points × (16 points occupied) Photocoupler Photocoupler 200-240VAC 50/60Hz 100-240VAC 50/60Hz Input voltage distortion within 5% r: Partial change required, QX28 ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use the appropriate number of QX28s when using 9 points or more. within 5% Approx. 17mA (200VAC, 60Hz), Rated input current Approx. 12mA Approx. 14mA (200VAC, 50Hz), (240VAC 60Hz) Approx. 8mA (100VAC, 60Hz), Approx. 7mA (100VAC, 50Hz) Max. 600mA within 0.5ms Inrush current Max. 500mA within 1ms (264VAC) (264VAC) Operating voltage range 170 to 264VAC 85 to 264VAC (50/60Hz ± 5%) (50/60Hz ± 3Hz) Maximum simultaneous 60% (20 points) on input point simultaneously ON ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current input resistance Response time OFF to ON ON to OFF Common terminal arrangement 160VAC or more/ 80VAC or more/5mA or more 5.5mA or more 70VAC or less/3.5mA or less (50Hz, 60Hz) 30VAC or less/1.7mA or less (50Hz, 60Hz) Approx. 22kΩ (60Hz), Approx. 12kΩ (60Hz), Approx. 24kΩ (50Hz) Approx. 15kΩ (50Hz) 15ms or less 10ms or less (200VAC 60Hz) (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 25ms or less 20ms or less (200VAC 60Hz) (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 32 points/common (common teminal: TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) Operation indicator Refer to the derating chart. *1 ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block Applicable crimping terminal Reduced. *2 8 points/common (common teminal:TB17) ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size r 0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (AWG14 to AWG19) (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5 (sleeved crimping × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 × terminals cannot be used) Review current capacity when Current consumption 0.15A (TYP. all points ON) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) r 0.50kg 0.20kg r r using 3 QX28s or more since current consumption is increased in that use. External dimensions Wiring space is narrower. Calculate weight carefully when Weight using 3 QX28s or more since the weight is increased in that use. *1 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *2 3 - 18 100% 45 100% 55 87.5%55 240V 264V 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX28. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (7) Specifications comparisons between AX31 and QX41 : Compatible, Specification Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage Rated input current AX31 QX41 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC, 12/24VAC (50/60Hz) 8.5mA (24VDC/AC), 4mA (12VDC/AC) r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 24VDC × 12/24VAC and 12VDC are not Approx. 4mA r Reduced. *2 applicable. *1 10.2 to 26.4VDC Operations voltage range (Ripple ratio within 5%), 20.4 to 28.8VDC 10.2 to 26.4VAC (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12/24VAC and 12VDC are not applicable. *1 (50/60Hz ± 5%) Maximum simultaneous on input point. ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current Input resistance 100% simultaneously ON 7VDC/AC or more/ 2mA or more 2.5VDC/AC or less /0.7mA or less Approx. 2.7kΩ 20ms or less (12/24VDC) , OFF to ON 25ms or less (12/24VAC 60Hz) Response time 20ms or less (12/24VDC) , ON to OFF 20ms or less (12/24VAC 60Hz) Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) Use within the range shown in the Refer to the derating chart. *3 r 19V or more/3mA or more × 12/24VAC and 12VDC are not 11V or less/1.7mA or less × 12/24VAC and 12VDC are not Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *2 derating figure. applicable. *1 applicable. *1 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/ 70ms or less Set the input response time of parameters to 20 ms. (CPU parameter setting) Initial setting is 10ms 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/ 70ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 20 ms. Initial setting is 10ms 32 points/common (common terminal:B01, B02) ON indication (LED) 38 points removable External connections terminal block 40 pin connector (option) × (M3 × 6 screws) Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal External dimensions *1 R1.25-3,R2-3, RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Current consumption Weight 0.75 to 2mm2 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) – × Wiring change is required. *4 × 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.49kg 0.15kg r For use of 12/24VAC, externally convert it into direct current before input. In the case of 12VDC, use the QX71. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX41. *3 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *4 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature By using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 19 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (8) Specifications comparisons between AX31-S1 and QX41 : Compatible, Specification Number of input points Isolation method AX31-S1 QX41 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Rated input voltage 24VDC 24VDC Rated input current 8.5mA Approx. 4mA 19.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) 100% simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart. *2 Operating voltage range Maximum simultaneous on input point ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current input resistance r: Partial change required, Compatibility r Reduced. *1 r 20.4VDC or more are required. r r 8VDC or less/2mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r Reduced. *1 Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *1 10ms or less time input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters. 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/ 10ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the 70ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters. Initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common teminal: TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) turn on. Use initial value (10ms) for the 70ms or less Initial setting is 10ms Response ON to OFF derating figure. 19VDC or more are required to 19V or more/3mA or more 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/ OFF to ON Use within the range shown in the 16VDC or more/5mA or more Approx. 2.7kΩ ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 32 points/common (common teminal:B01, B02) ON indication (LED) 38 points removable External connections terminal block 40 pin connector (option) × (M3 × 6 screws) Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal External dimensions 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) − 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.49kg 0.15kg Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX41. *2 The following figure shows derating. *3 × Wiring change is required. *3 × 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm *1 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 3 - 20 R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Current consumption Weight 0.75 to 2mm2 r 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature By using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (9) Specifications comparisons between AX40 and QX40 :Compatible, Specification AX40 Number of input points Isolation method QX40 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12V/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Rated input current Approx. 4mA/Approx. 10mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced. *2 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Operating voltage range Maximum simultaneous 100% (8 point/common) on input point simultaneously ON ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current 100% simultaneously ON 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Approx. 2.4kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *2 input resistance 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms 10ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) Response ON to OFF Use initial value (10ms) for the /70ms or less parameters. Use initial value (10ms) for the /70ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters. Initial setting is 10ms For wiring, a different voltage Common terminal arrangement 8 points/common 16 points/common (common teminal:TB9,TB18) (common teminal:TB17) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) r cannot be applied to each common since the QX40 has only one common. Operation indicator 20 points removable External connections terminal block (M3 × 6 screws) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal Current consumption External dimensions RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 18 points terminal block (M3×6 screws) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Wiring change is required. *3 R1.25-3 (Sleeved crimping × terminals cannot be used) 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.36kg 0.16kg Weight × r Wiring space is narrower. *1 Use the QX70 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX40. *3 The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX40) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 21 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (10) Specifications comparisons between AX40-UL and QX40 : Compatible, Specification AX40-UL Number of input points Isolation method QX40 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12V/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Rated input current Approx. 4mA/Approx. 10mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced. *2 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Operating voltage range Maximum simultaneous 100% (8 point/common) on input point simultaneously ON ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current 100% simultaneously ON 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Approx. 2.4kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *2 input resistance 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms 10ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) Response ON to OFF Use initial value (10ms) for the /70ms or less parameters. Use initial value (10ms) for the /70ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters. Initial setting is 10ms For wiring, a different voltage Common terminal arrangement 8 points/common 16 points/common (common teminal:TB9,TB18) (common teminal:TB17) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) r cannot be applied to each common since the QX40 has only one common. Operation indicator 20 points removable External connections terminal block (M3 × 6 screws) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal Current consumption External dimensions RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 (M3×6 screws) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (Sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.36kg 0.16kg Weight 3 - 22 18 points terminal block *1 Use the QX70 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX40. r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (11) Specifications comparisons between AX41 and QX41 : Compatible, Specification AX41 Number of input points Isolation method QX41 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12V/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Rated input current Approx. 4mA/Approx. 10mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced. *2 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Operating voltage range Maximum simultaneous 60% (5 point/common) on input point simultaneously ON ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current Refer to the derating chart. *3 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable. *1 Approx. 2.4kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *2 input resistance 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms 10ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) Response ON to OFF Use initial value (10ms) for the /70ms or less parameters. Use initial value (10ms) for the /70ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters. Initial setting is 10ms 8 points/common Common terminal arrangement (common teminal: TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) For wiring, a different voltage 32 points/common (common teminal:B01, B02) r cannot be applied to each common since the QX41 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block 40 pin connector (option) × (M3 × 6 screws) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Current consumption External dimensions 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) – 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.44kg 0.15kg *1 Use the QX71 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX41. *3 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *4 Wiring change is required. *4 × 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm Weight × r 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX41) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. Moreover, by using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 23 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (12) Specifications comparisons between AX41-S1 and QX41-S1 : Compatible, Specification AX41-S1 Number of input points Isolation method QX41-S1 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12V/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable. Rated input current Approx. 4mA/Approx. 10mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced. *1 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable. Operating voltage range Maximum simultaneous 60% (5 point/common) on input point simultaneously ON ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current Refer to the derating chart. *2 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable. 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 9.5V or less/1.5mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable. Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *1 input resistance Approx. 2.4kΩ 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms OFF to ON 0.1ms or less /1ms or less Set the input response time of parameters to 0.1 ms. (CPU parameter setting) Initial setting is 0.2ms Response time 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms ON to OFF 0.2ms or less /1ms or less Set the input response time of parameters to 0.1 ms. (CPU parameter setting) Initial setting is 0.2ms 8 points/common Common terminal arrangement (common teminal: TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) For wiring, a different voltage 32 points/common (common teminal:B01, B02) r cannot be applied to each common since the QX41-S1 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 38 points removable External connections terminal block 40 pin connector (option) × (M3 × 6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Current consumption External dimensions 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) − 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.44kg 0.15kg *1 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX41-S1. *2 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *3 Wiring change is required. *3 × 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm Weight × r 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX41) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. Moreover, by using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 24 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (13) Specifications comprarisons between AX41-UL and QX41 : Compatible, Specification AX41-UL Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage 32 points Photocoupler 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*2 r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC range (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) Maximum simultaneous 60% (5 point/common) Refer to the derating chart. on input point. ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 32 points Approx. 10mA Operations voltage r: Partial change required, Compatibility Photocoupler Approx. 4mA/ Rated input current QX41 simultaneously ON *3 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased.*2 Input resistance Approx. 2.4kΩ 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less /70ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 10ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. /70ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator 32 point/common 32 points/common (common terminal: (common terminal: TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) B01, B02) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block 40 pin connector (option) × (M3 × 6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Current consumption External dimensions 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) − 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.44kg 0.15kg *1 Use the QX71 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX41. *3 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *4 Wiring change is required.*4 × 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm Weight × r 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature By using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 25 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (14) Specifications comparisons between AX42 and QX42 : Compatible, Specification AX42 Number of input points Isolation method QX42 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Rated input current Approx. 3mA/Approx. 7mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*2 Operations voltage 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC range (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Maximum simultaneous 60% (20point/common) Refer to the derating chart. simultaneously ON *3 on input point. 9.5VDC or more/ ON voltage/ON current 3mA or more 6VDC or less/ OFF voltage/OFF current 1.5mA or less Input resistance Approx. 3.4kΩ r Use within the range shown in the derating figure. 19V or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *2 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less /70ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 10ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the (CPU parameter setting) input response time of parameters. /70ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the (CPU parameter setting) input response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms 32 points/common Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator 1B01,1B02,2B01,2B02) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using switch switch 40pin connector 40 pin connector × 2 (with solder) × 2 (option) 0.3mm Current consumption 0.12A (TYP. all points ON) separately. Purchase them separately. (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) 0.09A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.51kg 0.18kg *1 Use the QX72 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX42. *3 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 The 40 pin connectors are sold 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less 2 Applicable wire size Weight 3 - 26 (common terminal: 1B1,1B2,2B1,2B2) 32 point switch-over using External connections External dimensions 32 points/common (common terminal: 24VDC 26.4VDC 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature r 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (15) Specifications comparisons between AX42-S1 and QX42-S1 : Compatible, Specification Number of input points Isolation method AX42-S1 QX42-S1 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable. Rated input current Approx. 3mA/Approx. 7mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*1 Operations voltage 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable. range Maximum simultaneous on input point. 60% (20 point/common) simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart. *2 r Use within the range shown in the derating figure. ON voltage/ON current 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable. OFF voltage/OFF current 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 9.5V or less/1.5mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable. Approx. 3.4kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased.*1 Input resistance 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms OFF to ON 0.5ms or less /1ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 0.4 ms. Initial setting is 0.2ms Response time 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms ON to OFF 0.5ms or less /1ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 0.4 ms Initial setting is 0.2ms Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator External connections Applicable wire size 32 points/common (common terminal: 1B01, 2B1, 2B2) 1B02, 2B01, 2B02) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using 32 point switch-over using switch switch 40 pin connector 40 pin connector × 2 (option) (with solder) × 2 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less 0.3mm2 (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) Two external wiring Accessory connectors Current consumption External dimensions Weight 32 points/common (common terminal: 1B1, 1B2, 0.12A (TYP. all points ON) The 40 pin connectors are sold − separately. Purchase them separately. 0.09A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.51kg 0.18kg *1 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX42-S1. *2 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 × r 24VDC 26.4VDC 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature 3 - 27 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (16) Specifications comparisons between AX50-S1 and QX40 : Compatible, Specification Number of input points AX50-S1 QX40 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Rated input voltage 48VDC 24VDC Rated input current 4mA Approx. 4mA Isolation method Max. inrush current − − Operations voltage 38.4 to 57.6VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) range Maximum simultaneous on input point. ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current 100% (8 point/common) simultaneously ON r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable.*1 applicable.*1 100% simultaneously ON 34VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not 10VDC or less/1mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable.*1 applicable.*1 Include a resistor of 5.6kΩ(1/2W or Input resistance Approx. 11kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ × more) in series with the external signal line for input to the QX40. 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less /70ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 10ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the (CPU parameter setting) input response time of parameters. /70ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the (CPU parameter setting) input response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18) ON indication (LED) 20 points removable External connections terminal block (M3 × 6 screws) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal Current consumption External dimensions Weight *1 3 - 28 RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) For wiring, a different voltage 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) r cannot be applied to each common since the QX40 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screws) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.37kg 0.16kg r Wiring space is narrower. Connect a resistor of 5.6kΩ (1/2W or higher) serially to the external signal line that connects external devices to the QX40. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (17) Specifications comparisons between AX60-S1 and QX40 : Compatible, Specification Number of input points AX60-S1 QX40 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Rated input voltage 100/110/120VDC 24VDC Rated input current 2mA Approx. 4mA 65mA (121VDC) − Isolation method Max. inrush current Operations voltage range Maximum simultaneous on input point. ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current Input resistance 75mA (140VDC) 85 to 140VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) 60% (5 point/common) simultaneously ON 80VDC or more/1.4mA or more r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable.*1 applicable.*1 100% simultaneously ON 19V or more/3mA or more applicable.*1 20VDC or less/0.5mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not Approx. 50kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ × Input resistance is lower.*1 applicable.*1 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less /70ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 20ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. /70ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator 8 points/common ON indication (LED) 20 points removable External connections terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal Current consumption External dimensions Weight *1 RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QX40 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.40kg 0.16kg r Wiring space is narrower. Connect a resistor of 20kΩ (2W or higher) serially to the external signal line that connects external devices to the QX40. 3 - 29 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (18) Specifications comparisons between AX70 and QX70 : Compatible, Specification AX70 Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage Rated input current QX70 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 5VDC/12VDC/24VDC 5VDC/12VDC 3.5mA/2mA/4.5mA (TYP), 5VDC Approx. 1.2mA 5.5mA/3mA/6mA (MAX) 12VDC Approx. 3.3mA 4.5 to 5.5VDC (SW ON), (Ripple ratio within 5%) 10.2 to 26.4VDC (SW OFF) 10.2 to 14.4VDC r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 1V or less/0.1mA or less r Reduced.*2 Approx. 3.3kΩ r Increased.*2 4.25 to 6VDC Operations voltage range (Ripple ratio within 5%) Maximum simultaneous on input point. 100% (8 point/common) simultaneously ON 100% simultaneously ON 3.5VDC or more/1.0mA or ON voltage/ON current more (SW ON), 5VDC or more/1.0mA or more 3.5V or more/1mA or more (SW OFF) 1.1VDC or less/ OFF voltage/OFF current 0.2mA or less (SW ON), 2VDC or less/ 0.2mA or less (SW OFF) Input resistance Approx. 1.4kΩ (SW ON), Approx. 5.5kΩ (SW OFF) 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 1.5ms or less /70ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 3ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 1 ms. /70ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 1 ms. Initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18) ON indication (LED) 20 points removable terminal External connections block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal Current consumption External dimensions RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) (common terminal: TB17) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QX70 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required.*3 R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.36kg 0.14kg Weight r Wiring space is narrower. *1 Use the QX40-S1 at 24VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX70. *3 The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX40) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 30 16 points/common 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (19) Specifications comparisons between AX71 and QX71 : Compatible, Specification AX71 Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage Rated input current QX71 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 5VDC/12VDC/24VDC 5VDC/12VDC 3.5mA/2mA/4.5mA (TYP), 5VDC Approx. 1.2mA 5.5mA/3mA/6mA (MAX) 12VDC Approx. 3.3mA 4.5 to 5.5VDC (SW ON), (Ripple ratio within 5%) 10.2 to 26.4VDC (SW OFF) 10.2 to 14.4VDC r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 1V or less/0.1mA or less r Reduced.*2 Approx. 3.3kΩ r 4.25 to 6VDC Operations voltage range (Ripple ratio within 5%) Maximum simultaneous on input point. 100% (8 point/common) simultaneously ON 100% simultaneously ON 3.5VDC or more/ ON voltage/ON current 1.0mA or more (SW ON), 5VDC or more/ 3.5V or more/1mA or more 1.0mA or more (SW OFF) 1.1VDC or less/ OFF voltage/OFF current 0.2mA or less (SW ON), 2VDC or less/ 0.2mA or less (SW OFF) Input resistance Approx. 1.4kΩ (SW ON) , Approx. 5.5kΩ (SW OFF) The input resistance of the QX71 is greater than that of the AX71 SW ON status. 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 1.5ms or less /70ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 3ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 1 ms. /70ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 1 ms. Initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18, TB27, TB36) ON indication (LED) 32 points/common (common terminal: B01, B02) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QX71 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block 40 pin connector (option) × (M3 × 6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal Current consumption External dimensions R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) – Wiring change is required.*3 × 0.07A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.45kg 0.12kg Weight × r *1 Use the QX41-S1 at 24VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX71. *3 The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX41) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 31 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (20) Specifications comparisons between AX80 and QX80 : Compatible, Specification AX80 Number of input points Isolation method QX80 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Rated input current 4mA/10mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*2 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Operations voltage range Maximum simultaneous on input point. 100% (8 point/common) simultaneously ON 100% simultaneously ON ON voltage/ON current 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 OFF voltage/OFF current 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased.*2 Input resistance Approx. 2.4kΩ 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less /70ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 10ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. /70ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18) ON indication (LED) 20 points removable terminal External connections block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal Current consumption External dimensions RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) (common terminal: TB18) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QX80 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required.*3 R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.36kg 0.16kg Weight r Wiring space is narrower. *1 Use the QX70 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX80. *3 The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX80) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 32 16 points/common 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (21) Specifications comparisons between AX80E and QX82-S1 : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Specification AX80E QX82-S1 Compatibility Number of input points 16 points 64 points × Set 16 points in the I/O assignment Photocoupler Photocoupler Isolation method Precautions for replacement of Parameter. Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Rated input current 4mA/10mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*2 Operations voltage range 10.2 to 26.4VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Maximum simultaneous on input point. 100% (8 point/common) simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart. *3 r Use within the range shown in the derating figure. ON voltage/ON current 9.5VDC or more/2.6mA or more 19VDC or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 OFF voltage/OFF current 6VDC or less/1.0mA or less 9.5VDC or less/1.5mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Approx. 2.4kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased.*2 5.5ms (TYP.) 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms /1ms or less (CPU parameter setting) Initial setting is 0.2ms r Set the input response time of parameters to 1 ms. 6.0ms (TYP.) 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms /1ms or less (CPU parameter setting) Initial setting is 0.2ms r Set the input response time of parameters to 1 ms. 0.5ms or less 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms /1ms or less (CPU parameter setting) Initial setting is 0.2ms r Set the input response time of parameters to 0.4 ms. 1.0ms or less 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms /1ms or less (CPU parameter setting) Initial setting is 0.2ms r Set the input response time of parameters to 0.4 ms. Common terminal arrangement 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18) 32 points/common (common terminal: 1B01, 1B02, 2B01, 2B02) r For wiring, a different voltage cannot be applied to each common since the QX82-S1 has only one common. Operation indicator ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using switch External connections 20 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 40 pin connector × 1 (option) × Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) × Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 – × Current consumption 0.055A (TYP. all points ON) 0.09A (TYP. all points ON) r External dimensions 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) r 0.36kg 0.18kg Input resistance OFF to ON Response time ON to OFF Response time highspeed mode (upper 8 points only) OFF to ON ON to OFF Weight *1 Wiring change is required. Reviewing power supply capacity is required. Use the QX70 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX82-S1. *3 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 24VDC 26.4VDC 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature 3 - 33 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (22) Specifications comparisons between AX81 and QX81 : Compatible, Specification AX81 Number of input points Isolation method QX81 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Rated input current 4mA/10mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*2 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Operations voltage range Maximum simultaneous on input point. 60% (5 point/common) simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart. *3 ON voltage/ON current 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19VDC or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 OFF voltage/OFF current 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 11VDC or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased.*2 Input resistance Approx. 2.4kΩ 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/ OFF to ON 70ms or less 10ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/ ON to OFF Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. 70ms or less 10ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms 8 points/common Common terminal (common terminal: TB9, arrangement TB18, TB27, TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 32 points/common (common terminal: 17, 18, 36) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QX81 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block 37 pin D-sub connector (option) × 0.3mm2 (For A6CON1E) × – × (M3 × 6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Current consumption External dimensions 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.45kg 0.16kg Weight *1 Use the QX71 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX81. *3 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *4 Wiring change is required.*4 r 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX81) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. Moreover, by using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36-E, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 34 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (23) Specifications comparisons between AX81B and QX81 Specification Number of input points Isolation method Rated input voltage Rated input current Operating voltage range Maximum simultaneous input point AX81B 32 points (64 points occupied) Photocoupler 24VDC 7mA (When turning ON an external switch) 1.5mA (When turning OFF an external switch) 21.6 to 30VDC (ripple ratio within 5%) 60% (5 points/ common) simultaneously ON 21.0VDC or more/5.4mA or more ON voltage/ON current (Normal input) 1.0VDC or less/0.2mA or less QX81 32 points : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement Set 64 points in the I/O assignment × of Parameter. Photocoupler 24VDC Approx. 4mA 20.4 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio within 5%) × r The wire breakage detection function not provided Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable. Refer to the derating diagram *1 19VDC or more/3mA or more × The wire breakage detection 11VDC or less/1.7mA or less × The wire breakage detection Approx. 5.6 kΩ × The wire breakage detection Not provided × The wire breakage detection function not provided (Wire breakage detection) 7.0VDC or less/1.9mA or less OFF voltage/OFF current (Normal input) 6.0VDC or more/1.3mA or more (Wire breakage detection) Approx. 3.6kΩ (Normal input) Input resistance Approx. 4.3kΩ (Wire breakage detection) Wire breakage detection Provided 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less OFF to ON 10ms or less Response ON to OFF 10ms or less function not provided function not provided Use initial value (10ms) for the (CPU parameter setting) input response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less time function not provided Use initial value (10ms) for the (CPU parameter setting) input response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms 0.1kΩ or less (At turning ON) 11.4 to 12.7kΩ or less (At turning External resistance Since the wire breakage detection OFF) – – 150kΩ or more (At wire breakage function is not provided, the external resistance is not required. detection) Parallel resistance with external switch Common terminal arrangement External connections Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal Current consumption External dimensions Weight *1 8 points/common (Common terminal: TB9, TB18, ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using switch 38 points terminal block connector (M3 × 6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 R1.25-3,R2-3 – function is not provided, the external resistance is not required. For wiring, a different voltage 32 points/common (Common terminal: 17, 18, 36) r cannot be applied to each common since four commons will be one common. ON indication (LED) 37 pin D-sub connector (option) × 0.3mm (For A6CON1E) × – × 2 RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 0.125A (TYP. all points ON) 250(H)×37.5(W)×131(D)mm 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 98(H)×27.4(W)×90(D)mm (9.84(H)×1.48(W)×5.16(D)inch) 0.45kg (3.86(H)×1.08(W)×3.54(D)inch) 0.16kg Wiring change is required.*2 r The following figure shows derating. 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *2 – (Tolerance: ±5%, 1/4W or more) TB27, TB36) Operation indicator Since the wire breakage detection 12kΩ 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature By using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36-E, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 35 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (24) Specifications comparisons between AX81-S1 and QX81 : Compatible, Specification AX81-S1 Number of input points Isolation method QX81 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Rated input current 2.5mA/5mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*2 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 19VDC or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 2.4VDC or less/0.39mA or less 11VDC or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Approx. 4.8kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased.*2 Operations voltage range Maximum simultaneous on input point. 60% (5 point/common) simultaneously ON 5.6VDC or more/ ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current 1.1mA or more Input resistance Refer to the derating chart. *3 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON /70ms or less 10ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. /70ms or less 10ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms 8 points/common Common terminal (common terminal: TB9, arrangement TB18, TB27, TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal External dimensions (common terminal: 17, 18, 36) 37 pin D-sub connector × – × Wiring change is required.*4 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.45kg 0.16kg Use the QX71 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX81. *3 The following figure shows derating. *4 × 0.3mm2 (For A6CON1E) *1 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 the QX81 has only one common. 0.75 to 2mm2 0.105A (TYP. all points ON) be applied to each common since ON indication (LED) (option) R1.25-3, R2-3, Weight For wiring, a different voltage cannot r (M3 × 6 screw) RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Current consumption 32 points/common r 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTX81) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. Moreover, by using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36-E, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 36 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (25) Specifications comparisons between AX81-S2 and QX81 : Compatible, Specification AX81-S2 Number of input points QX81 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Rated input voltage 48VDC/60VDC 24VDC Rated input current 3mA/4mA Approx. 4mA Isolation method Operations voltage range Maximum simultaneous 41 to 66VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) 60% (5 point/common) on input point. simultaneously ON 31VDC or more/ ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current 1.7mA or more ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not × Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable.*1 applicable.*1 Refer to the derating chart. *2 19VDC or more/3mA or more 10VDC or less/0.5mA or less 11VDC or less/1.7mA or less Approx. 18kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ Input resistance r: Partial change required, Compatibility applicable.*1 applicable.*1 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 20ms or less (60VDC) /70ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 20ms or less (60VDC) Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 20 ms. /70ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 20 ms. Initial setting is 10ms 8 points/common Common terminal (common terminal: TB9, arrangement TB18, TB27, TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block Applicable wire size Applicable crimping External dimensions *1 37 pin D-sub connector × 0.3mm2 (For A6CON1E) × – × Wiring change is required.*3 0.075A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.45kg 0.16kg Weight the QX81 has only one common. 0.75 to 2mm2 0.110A (TYP. all points ON) be applied to each common since ON indication (LED) (option) RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Current consumption (common terminal: 17, 18, 36) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r (M3 × 6 screw) R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal 32 points/common r For use of 48VDC, connect a resistor of 5.6kΩ(1/2W or more) in series with the external signal line connected between Q81 and an external device. For use of 60VDC, connect a resistor of 8.2kΩ(1W or more) in series with the external signal line connected between Q81 and an external device. *2 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 *3 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature By using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36-E, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 37 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (26) Specifications comparisons between AX81-S3 and QX82-S1 : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Specification AX81-S3 QX82-S1 Compatibility Number of input points 32 points 64 points × Set 32 points in the I/O assignment Photocoupler Photocoupler Isolation method Precautions for replacement of Parameter. Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable. Rated input current 4mA/10mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*1 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable. Operations voltage range Maximum simultaneous on input point. 60% (5 point/common) simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart. *2 r Use within the range shown in the derating figure. ON voltage/ON current 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19VDC or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable. OFF voltage/OFF current 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 9.5VDC or less/1.5mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable. Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased.*1 Input resistance Approx. 2.4kΩ 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms OFF to ON 0.1ms or less /1ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 0.1 ms. Initial setting is 0.2ms Response time 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms ON to OFF 0.2ms or less /1ms or less Set the input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters to 0.1 ms. Initial setting is 0.2ms Common terminal arrangement 8 points/common 32 points/common (common terminal: TB9, (common terminal: 1B01, 1B02, TB18, TB27, TB36) 2B01, 2B02) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QX82-S1 has only one common. ON indication (LED) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using switch 38 points removable terminal External connections 40 pin connector × 1 (option) block × (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal External dimensions 0.110A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) – 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.45kg 0.18kg Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX82-S1. *2 The following figure shows derating. 24VDC 26.4VDC 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature × × 0.09A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm *1 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 3 - 38 R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Current consumption Weight 0.75 to 2mm2 r Wiring change is required. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (27) Specifications comparisons between AX82 and QX82 : Compatible, Specification AX82 Number of input points Isolation method QX82 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Rated input current Approx. 3mA/Approx. 7mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced.*2 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio within 5%) (Ripple ratio within 5%) r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Operations voltage range 40points Maximum simultaneous on input point. (When located next to the Use within the range shown in the Refer to the derating chart. *3 r 19V or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 6VDC or less/1.0mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not applicable.*1 Approx. 3.4kΩ Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased.*2 power supply module : derating figure. 26points) ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current 9.5VDC or more/ 2.6mA or more Input resistance 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON /70ms or less 10ms or less Response Initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. /70ms or less 10ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. Initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrangement Operation indicator External connections 32 points/common 32 points/common (common terminal: 1-17, 1-18, (common terminal: 1B01, 1B02, 1-36, 2-17, 2-18, 2-36) 2B01, 2B02) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using 32 point switch-over using switch switch 37 pin D-sub connector 40 pin connector × 2 (option) (Soldered) × 2 (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) Tow external wiring Accessory D sub-connectors Current consumption External dimensions The 40 pin connectors are sold – 0.090A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.60kg 0.18kg *1 Use the QX72 at 12VDC. *2 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX82. *3 The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 × separately. Purchase them separately. 0.12A (TYP. all points ON) Weight Connector change is required. 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less 0.3mm2 Applicable wire size × r 24VDC 26.4VDC 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature 3 - 39 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3.2.2 Specifications Comparisons Between Output Module (1) Specifications comparisons between AY10 and QY10 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points AY10 QY10 16 points 16 points Isolation method Photocoupler Relay Rated switching voltage/current 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA Minimum switching load Maximum switchng voltage Leakage current at OFF OFF to ON Response time ON to OFF Mechanical Life Electrical 264VAC 125VDC – 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.7A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more Maximum switching frequency Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator External power supply Voltage Current External connections 3600 times/hour 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18) ON indication (LED) 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less 150mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) 20 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 264VAC 125VDC – 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more r: Partial change required, Precautions for replacement r Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r Replace the module more frequently since the life is approximately half. r 3600 times/hour 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) r – External power supply is not required. – × 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) × 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) r 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) 0.44kg 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.22kg 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 For wiring, a different voltage cannot be applied to each common since the QY10 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size ×: Incompatible Compatibility Wiring change is required.*1 × Since more current is consumed, the Current consumption current capacity must be reexamined. External dimensions Weight *1 Wiring space is narrower. The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY10) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 40 r 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (2) Specifications comparisons between AY10A and QY18A : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated switching voltage/current Minimum switching load AY10A 16 points Compatibility 8 points × (16 points occupied) Photocoupler Relay 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 16A/all points 8A/all points 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA Maximum switchng 264VAC 264VAC voltage 125VDC 125VDC Response OFF to ON 10ms or less 10ms or less time ON to OFF 12ms or less 12ms or less Mechanical r: Partial change required, QY18A 20 million times or more 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand current load 100 thousand times or more times or more r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY18As when using 9 points or more. Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand Life Electrical times or more 200VAC 0.7A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A Replace the module more frequently (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A since the life is approximately half. r (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more Maximum switching frequency Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator External Voltage power supply Current 3600 times/hour Not provided Not provided (all points independent) (all points independent) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less 150mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) 38 points removable terminal External connections block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal 3600 times/hour RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 – External power supply is not required. – 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) Since more current is consumed, the Current consumption 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) 0.24A (TYP. all points ON) r current capacity must be reexamined. External dimensions Weight 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.50kg 0.22kg r Wiring space is narrower. 3 - 41 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (3) Specifications comparisons between AY11 and QY10 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points AY11 QY10 16 points 16 points Isolation method Photocoupler Relay Rated switching voltage/current 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 5VDC 1mA 5V 1mA DC Minimum switching load Maximum switchng voltage Leakage current at OFF OFF to ON Response time ON to OFF Mechanical Life Electrical Maximum switching frequency Surge suppressor 264VAC 125VDC 0.1mA (200VAC, 60Hz) 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.7A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more 264VAC 125VDC – 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more r: Partial change required, Precautions for replacement r Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r Replace the module more frequently since the life is approximately half. r 3600 times/hour 3600 times/hour varistor (387 to 473V) None × Yes None × Common terminal arrengement 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9,TB18) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) r Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less 150mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) 20 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) ON indication (LED) Relay socket External power supply Voltage Current External connections – × 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) × 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) r 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) 0.50kg 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.22kg 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Varistors are not built in.*1 Replace the module itself when its relay has a failure. It is not applicable to use a different voltage for each eight points since the QY10 has only one common. External power supply is not required. – 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size ×: Incompatible Compatibility Wiring change is required.*2 × Since more current is consumed, the Current consumption current capacity must be reexamined. External dimensions Weight Wiring space is narrower. *1 Connect a varistor to reduce external noise. *2 The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY10) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 42 r 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (4) Specifications comparisons between AY11A and QY18A : Compatible, Specification r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible AY11A QY18A Compatibility Number of output points 16 points 8 points (16 points occupied) × Use two QY18As when using 9 points or more. Isolation method Photocoupler Relay r Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. Rated switching voltage/current 24VDC 2A (resistive load) / point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 16A/all points 24VDC 2A (resistive load) / point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/all points Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA Maximum switchng voltage 264VAC 125VDC 264VAC 125VDC Leakage current at OFF Response time Life OFF to ON 0.1mA (200VAC, 60Hz) – 10ms or less 10ms or less ON to OFF 12ms or less 12ms or less Mechanical 20 million times or more 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.7A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more Electrical Maximum switching frequency 3600 times/hour r Replace the module more frequently since the life is approximately half. r 3600 times/hour × Surge suppressor varistor (387 to 473V) None Common terminal arrengement Not provided (all points independent) Not provided (all points independent) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) Voltage 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less – Current 150mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) – External connections 38 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) × Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) × Current consumption 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) 0.24A (TYP. all points ON) r External dimensions 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.47kg 0.22kg External power supply Precautions for replacement Varistors are not built in.*1 External power supply is not required. Wiring change is required. Since more current is consumed, the current capacity must be reexamined. Weight *1 r Wiring space is narrower. Connect a varistor to reduce external noise. 3 - 43 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (5) Specifications comparisons between AY11AEU and QY18A : Compatible, Specification r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible AY11AEU QY18A Compatibility Number of output points 16 points 8 points (16 points occupied) × Use two QY18As when using 9 points or more. Isolation method Photocoupler Relay r Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. Rated switching voltage/current 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 24VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 16A/all points 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/all points Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA Maximum switchng voltage 49.9VAC 74.9VDC 264VAC 125VDC Leakage current at OFF Response time Life OFF to ON 0.1mA (49.9VAC, 60Hz) – 10ms or less 10ms or less ON to OFF 12ms or less 12ms or less Mechanical 20 million times or more 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 100 thousand times or more 24VAC 1.5A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand times or more 24VAC 0.75A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 48VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more Electrical Maximum switching frequency 3600 times/hour r Replace the module more frequently since the life is approximately half. r 3600 times/hour × Surge suppressor varistor (387 to 473V) None Common terminal arrengement Not provided (all points independent) Not provided (all points independent) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) Voltage 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less – Current 150mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) – External connections 38 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) × Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) × Current consumption 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) 0.24A (TYP. all points ON) r External dimensions 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.47kg 0.22kg External power supply Precautions for replacement Varistors are not built in.*1 External power supply is not required. Wiring change is required. Since more current is consumed, the current capacity must be re-calculated. Weight *1 Connect a varistor to reduce external noise. 3 - 44 r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (6) Specifications comparisons between AY11E and QY10 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points AY11E QY10 16 points 16 points Isolation method Photocoupler Relay Rated switching voltage/current 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA 250VAC 125VDC 0.1mA (200VAC, 60Hz) 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand times or more 264VAC 125VDC – 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more Minimum switching load Maximum switchng voltage Leakage current at OFF OFF to ON Response time ON to OFF Mechanical Life Electrical Maximum switching frequency Surge suppressor 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.7A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more 3600 times/hour r: Partial change required, Precautions for replacement r Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r Replace the module more frequently since the life is approximately half. r 3600 times/hour varistor (387 to 473V) None × Common terminal arrengement 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) r Operation indicator Fuse Fuse blow indicator ON indication (LED) 8A MF51NM8 or FGMA250V8A None 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less 150mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) 20 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) ON indication (LED) None – × External power supply Voltage Current External connections – × 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) r 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) 0.47kg 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.22kg 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Varistors are not built in.*1 For wiring, a different voltage cannot be applied to each common since the QY10 has only one common. Fuses are not built in.*2 External power supply is not required. – 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) Applicable wire size ×: Incompatible Compatibility × Wiring change is required.*3 × Since more current is consumed, the Current consumption current capacity must be re-calculated. External dimensions Weight *1 r Wiring space is narrower. Connect a varistor to reduce external noise. *2 Mount a fuse on every external terminal to prevent external devices and modules from burning out upon load short circuit. *3 The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY10) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 45 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (7) Specifications comparisons between AY11EEU and QY10 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points AY11EEU QY10 16 points 16 points Isolation method Photocoupler Relay Rated switching voltage/current 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 24VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA 49.9VAC 74.9VDC 264VAC 125VDC Minimum switching load Maximum switchng voltage Leakage current at OFF OFF to ON Response time ON to OFF Mechanical Life Electrical Maximum switching frequency Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator Fuse Fuse blow indicator External power supply Voltage Current External connections 0.1mA (49.9VAC, 60Hz) 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand times or more 24VAC 1.5A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand times or more 24VAC 0.75A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 48VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more 3600 times/hour – 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more r: Partial change required, Precautions for replacement r Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r Replace the module more frequently since the life is approximately half. r 3600 times/hour varistor (387 to 473V) None × 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) r ON indication (LED) 8A MF51NM8 or FGMA250V 8A None 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less 150mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) 20 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) ON indication (LED) None – × – × 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) r 250 (D) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) 0.47kg 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.22kg 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 Varistors are not built in.*1 For wiring, a different voltage cannot be applied to each common since the QY10 has only one common. Fuses are not built in.*2 External power supply is not required. – 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) Applicable wire size ×: Incompatible Compatibility × Wiring change is required.*3 × Since more current is consumed, the Current consumption current capacity must be re-calculated. External dimensions Weight Wiring space is narrower. *1 Connect a varistor to reduce external noise. *2 Mount a fuse on every external terminal to prevent external devices and modules from burning out upon load short circuit. *3 The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY10) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 46 r 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (8) Specifications comparisons between AY11-UL and QY10 : Compatible, Specification AY11-UL QY10 Number of output points 16 points 16 points Isolation method Photocoupler Relay Rated switching voltage/current 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA Maximum switchng voltage 264VAC 125VDC 264VAC 125VDC Leakage current at OFF Response time Life OFF to ON 0.1mA (200VAC, 60Hz) – 10ms or less 10ms or less ON to OFF 12ms or less 12ms or less Mechanical 20 million times or more 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.7A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more Electrical Maximum switching frequency 3600 times/hour 3600 times/hour 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) Surge suppressor varistor (387 to 473V) r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement r Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r Replace the module more frequently since the life is approximately half. r r For wiring, a different voltage cannot be applied to each common since the QY10 has only one common. None × Varistors are not built in.*1 Yes None × Replace the module itself when its relay has a failure. Voltage 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less – Current 150mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) – External connections 20 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) × Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) × Current consumption 0.12A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) r External dimensions 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.50kg 0.22kg Common terminal arrengement Relay socket External power supply External power supply is not required. Wiring change is required. Since more current is consumed, the current capacity must be re-calculated. Weight *1 r Wiring space is narrower. Connect a varistor to reduce external noise. 3 - 47 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (9) Specifications comparisons between AY13 and QY10 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated switching voltage/current Minimum switching load r: Partial change required, AY13 QY10 Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Photocoupler Relay r 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 5A/common 8A/common 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA Maximum switchng 264VAC 264VAC voltage 125VDC 125VDC 10ms or less Response OFF to ON 10ms or less time ON to OFF 12ms or less 12ms or less Mechanical 20 million times or more 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand current load 100 thousand times or more times or more ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY10s when using 17 points or more. Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand Life Electrical times or more 200VAC 0.7A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A Replace the module more frequently (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A since the life is approximately half. r (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more Maximum switching frequency Common terminal arrengement Voltage power supply 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18, TB27, TB36) Operation indicator External 3600 times/hour Current ON indication (LED) 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less 290mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) 38 points removable terminal External connections block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 3600 times/hour 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY10 has only one common. ON indication (LED) – External power supply is not required. – 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) Since more current is consumed, the Current consumption 0.23A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) r current capacity must be re-calculated. External dimensions Weight 3 - 48 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.59kg 0.22kg r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (10) Specifications comparisons between AY13E and QY10 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points r: Partial change required, AY13E QY10 Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Isolation method Photocoupler Relay r Rated switching voltage/current 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 5A/common 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA Maximum switchng voltage 250VAC 125VDC 264VAC 125VDC 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more 10ms or less 12ms or less 20 million times or more Response time OFF to ON ON to OFF Mechanical Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand times or more Life Electrical Maximum switching frequency Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator Fuse Fuse blow indicator External power supply Voltage Current External connections 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.7A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more Rated switching voltage/ current load 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more 3600 times/hour 3600 times/hour None 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18, TB27, TB36) ON indication (LED) 8A MF51NM8 or FGMA250V8A None None 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less 290mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) 38 points removable terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY10s when using 17 points or more. Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r Replace the module more frequently since the life is approximately half. r r For wiring, a different voltage cannot be applied to each common since the QY10 has only one common. × Fuses are not built in.*1 ON indication (LED) None – – External power supply is not required. – 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) × Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3, R2-3, RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) × Current consumption 0.23A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) r External dimensions 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.60kg 0.22kg Wiring change is required. Since more current is consumed, the current capacity must be re-calculated. Weight *1 r Wiring space is narrower. Mount a fuse on every external terminal to prevent external devices and modules from burning out upon load short circuit. 3 - 49 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (11) Specifications comparisons between AY13EU and QY10 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated switching voltage/current Minimum switching load r: Partial change required, AY13EU QY10 Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Photocoupler Relay r 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 24VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 5A/common 8A/common 5VDC 1mA 5VDC 1mA Maximum switchng 49.9VAC 264VAC voltage 74.9VDC 125VDC Leakage current at OFF – – 10ms or less 10ms or less Response OFF to ON time ON to OFF 12ms or less 12ms or less Mechanical 20 million times or more 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand current load 100 thousand times or more times or more ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY10s when using 17 points or more. Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. r 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand 24VAC 1.5A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand Life Electrical times or more 24VAC 0.75A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 48VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A Replace the module more frequently (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A since the life is approximately half. r (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more Maximum switching frequency Common terminal arrengement Voltage power supply 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB18, TB27, TB36) Operation indicator External 3600 times/hour Current ON indication (LED) 24VDC ±10% ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less 290mA (24VDC TYP. all points ON) 38 points removable terminal External connections block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 3600 times/hour 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY10 has only one common. ON indication (LED) – External power supply is not required. – 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) Since more current is consumed, the Current consumption 0.23A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) r current capacity must be re-calculated. External dimensions Weight 3 - 50 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.59kg 0.22kg r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (12) Specifications comparisons between AY15EU and QY10 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points AY15EU 24 points (32 points occupied) Isolation method Rated switching voltage/current Minimum switching load Photocoupler 24VDC 2A (resistive load) /point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/ common 5VDC 10mA Compatibility 16 points × Relay r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY10s when using 17 points or more. Isolation method is different, but the performance is equivalent. 24VDC 2A (resistive load) / point 240VAC 2A (COSφ=1) /point 8A/common 5VDC 1mA Maximum switchng 264VAC 264VAC voltage 125VDC 125VDC Leakage current at OFF r: Partial change required, QY10 – – 10ms or less 10ms or less Response OFF to ON time ON to OFF 12ms or less 12ms or less Mechanical 20 million times or more 20 million times or more Rated switching voltage/ Rated switching voltage/ current load 200 thousand current load 100 thousand times or more times or more r 200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COSφ=0.7) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A 200VAC 2A, 240VAC 1.8A (COSφ=0.7) 200 thousand Life Electrical times or more 200VAC 1.1A, 240VAC 0.9A (COSφ=0.35) 200 thousand times or more 24VDC 1.1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 200 thousand times or more (COSφ=0.7) 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A Replace the module more frequently (COSφ=0.35) 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A since the life is approximately half. r (COSφ=0.35) 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more Maximum switching frequency Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement 3600 times/hour 3600 times/hour None None 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9, TB20, TB31) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) For wiring, a different voltage cannot be r applied to each common since the QY10 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 24VDC ±10% External Voltage – (Must be SELV power supply) power supply ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less External power supply is not required. 220mA Current (24VDC TYP. all points ON) – (Must be SELV power supply) 38 points removable terminal External connections block (M3 × 6 screw) Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal 18 points terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (AWG14 to AWG19) (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5 R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used) × × Wiring change is required. × 3 - 51 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT Specification AY15EU QY10 Compatibility Precautions for replacement (AC external batch relaydrive power supply. 5V internal circuit) Dielectric withstand voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycle (2,000m (6557,38ft) ) (Relay-drive power supply, 5V 2830VAC rms/3 cycle (altitude 2,000m (6557,38ft) ) internal circuit) 500VAC rms/3 cycle (2,000m (6557,38ft) ) Insulation resistance 10MΩ or more by insulation resistans tester 10MΩ or more by insulation resistans tester By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, Noise durability IEC801-4 : 1kV 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 1kV Current consumption External dimensions Weight 3 - 52 0.15A (TYP. all points ON) 0.43A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D)inch) 0.50kg 0.22kg r r Since more current is consumed, the current capacity must be re-calculated. Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (13) Specifications comparisons between AY22 and QY22 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method AY22 QY22 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 100-240VAC 50/60Hz ±5% 100-240VAC (+10/-15%) Maximum load voltage 264VAC 288VAC Maximum load current 2A/point,3.3A/common 0.6A/point, 4.8A/common 24VAC 100mA 24VAC 100mA 100VAC 10mA 100VAC 25mA 240VAC 20mA 240VAC 25mA Rated load voltage r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Carefully select load for use since × the maximum load current per point is lowered. Minimum load voltage current Maximum inrush 40A 10ms or less current 15A 100ms or less Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON Response time 20A 1 cycle or less 1.5mA (120VAC 60Hz) 1.5mA or less (for 120V 60Hz) 3mA (240VAC 60Hz) 3mA or less (for 240V 60Hz) Carefully select load for use since r the minimum load current is increased. r Carefully select load for use since the inrush current value differs. 1.5VAC or less (1 to 2A) 1.8VAC or less (0.2 to 1A) 1.5V or less 5VAC or less (0.2A or less) OFF to ON ON to OFF 1ms or less 1ms + 0.5 cycles or less 1ms or less 1ms + 0.5 cycles or less (rated load,resistans load) CR absober Surge suppressor (0.022µF+47Ω) CR absober r Varistors are not built in. *1 Varistor (387 to 473V) Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator 8 points/common (common terminal : TB9,TB18) ON indication (LED) 7A fast blow fuse (1 fuse per Fuse common) type HP-70K 16 points/common (common terminal : TB17) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r the QY22 has only one common. ON indication (LED) None (Installing a fuse to an external × cable is recommended.) Fuses are not built in. *2 Yes Fuse blow indicator (LED is turned ON when fuse is blown. Signal is output to a be applied to each common since – × 18 points terminal block (M3×6 × PLC CPU.) 20 points removable terminal External connections block (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal Current consumption External dimensions Weight RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 0.305A (TYP.all points ON) screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Wiring change is required. *3 R1.25-3 sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used 0.25A (MAX.all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 112.3 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 4.42 (D) inch) 0.71kg 0.40kg r Wiring space is narrower. *1 Connect a varistor to reduce external noise. *2 Mount a fuse on every external terminal to prevent the external device and module deterioration upon load short circuit. Also, configure an external circuit when displaying fuse blown is required. *3 Using the conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY22) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the external wiring change. 3 - 53 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (14) Specifications comparisons between AY23 and QY22 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Maximum load voltage r: Partial change required, AY23 QY22 Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Photocoupler Photocoupler 100-240VAC 40 to 70Hz 100-240VAC (+20/-15%) 264VAC 288VAC ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY22s when using 17 points or more. 0.6A/point,2.4A/common Maximum load current (When placing next to the power supply module: 1.05A/ 0.6A/point, 4.8A/common common) Minimum load voltage current 24VAC 100mA 24VAC 100mA 100VAC 10mA 100VAC 25mA 240VAC 10mA 240VAC 25mA Maximum inrush 20A 10ms or less current 8A 100ms or less Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON Response time Carefully select load for use since r the minimum load current is increased. 20A 1 cycle or less 1.5mA (120VAC 60Hz) 1.5mA or less (for 120V 60Hz) 3mA (240VAC 60Hz) 3mA or less (for 240V 60Hz) 1.5VAC or less (100 to 600mA) 1.8VAC or less (50 to 100mA) 1.5V or less 2VAC or less (10 to 50mA) OFF to ON ON to OFF Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator 1ms or less 1ms + 0.5 cycles or less CR absober (0.022µF + 47Ω) 8 points/common (common terminal : TB9,TB18,TB27,TB36) ON indication (LED) 3.2A fast blow fuse (1 fuse per Fuse common) type HP-32 1ms or less 1ms + 0.5 cycles or less (rated load,resistans load) CR absober 16 points/common (common terminal : TB17) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r the QY22 has only one common. ON indication (LED) None × – × 18 points terminal block × Yes Fuse blow indicator (LED is turned ON when fuse is blown. Signal is output to a be applied to each common since Fuses are not built in. *1 PLC CPU.) 38 points removable terminal External connections block (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal Current consumption External dimensions Weight *1 RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 0.59A (TYP.all points ON) (M3×6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used 0.25A (MAX.all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 112.3 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 4.42(D) inch) 0.55kg 0.40kg r Wiring space is narrower. Mount a fuse on every external terminal to prevent the external device and module deferioration upon load short circuit. Also, configure an external circuit when displaying fuse blown is required. 3 - 54 × 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (15) Specifications comparisons between AY40 and QY40P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Maximum load current Maximum inrush current Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON Response time AY40 QY40P 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2-40VDC 10.2-28.8VDC 0.1A/point,0.8A/common 0.1A/point, 1.6A/common 0.4A 0.7A 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less 2.5VDC (0.1A) 1.75VDC (5mA) 1.7VDC (1mA) OFF to ON ON to OFF Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement 2ms or less 2ms or less (resistive load) Clamp diode 8 points/common (common terminal: TB10,TB20) Operation indicator Protection External connections 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal External RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Voltage power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions Weight *1 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Zener diode 16 points/common (common terminal: TB18) Yes Applicable wire size 12/24VDC (10.2 to 40VDC) 18 points terminal block (M3×6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY40P has only one common. × × Wiring change is required. *1 R1.25-3 sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8V) r (ripple ratio within 5%) 8mA 10mA (at 24VDC) (24VDC TYP. per common) (MAX. all points ON) 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) applicable. 1ms or less None (M3×6 screw) Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A ON indication (LED) block r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A ON indication (LED) 20 points removable terminal r: Partial change required, Compatibility Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 0.065A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.36kg 0.16kg r Wiring space is narrower. Using the conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY40) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the external wiring change. 3 - 55 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (16) Specifications comparisons between AY40A and QY68A : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range AY40A 16 points 8 points × (16 points occupied) Photocoupler 12/24VDC 5/24VDC (Max. applied voltage) Maximum load current Compatibility Photocoupler 10.2 to 30VDC 4.5 to 28.8VDC 0.3A/point 2A/point, 8A/unit 1A 100ms or less 8A 10ms or less Leakage current (OFF) 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less Maximum voltage drop 1.5VDC (50mA to 0.3A) at ON 1.0VDC (50mA or less) Maximum inrush current r: Partial change required, QY68A r OFF to ON 2ms or less 3ms or less r time ON to OFF 2ms or less (resistive load) 10ms or less (resistive load) r Surge suppressor Surge suppression diode Zener diode Common terminal Not provided (all points inde- Not provided (all points inde- Operation indicator pendent) pendent) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Use two QY68As when using 9 points or more. Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 0.3VDC (MAX.) 2A Response arrengement ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 18 points terminal block (M3×6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) Response time differs. × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 sleeved crimping terminals cannot × be used Review current capacity when using Current consumption 0.19A (TYP. all points ON) 0.11A (TYP. all points ON) r 2 QY68As since current consumption is increased in that use. External dimensions Weight 3 - 56 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.42kg 0.14kg r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (17) Specifications comparisons between AY41 and QY41P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Maximum load current Maximum inrush current Leakage current (OFF) 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 40VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC 0.1A/point 0.1A/point 1.6A/common 2A/common 0.4A 0.7A 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less 1.75VDC (5mA) at ON time QY41P 2.5VDC (0.1A) Maximum voltage drop Response AY41 1.7VDC (1mA) OFF to ON ON to OFF 2ms or less 2ms or less (resistans load) Surge suppressor Clamp diode 16 points/common Common terminal (common terminal: arrengement TB18,TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) r: Partial change required, Compatibility r r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Reviewing power supply capacity is required. Pay attention to the common current. 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 1ms or less 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Zener diode 32 points/common (common terminal: A01, A02) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY41P has only one common. ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block 40-pin connetctor (optional) × (M3×6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal External RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 12/24VDC Voltage (10.2 to 40VDC) power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions 20mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.23A (TYP. all points ON) (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) – × Wiring change is required. *1 × 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8V) r (ripple ratio within 5%) Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) 0.105A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.44kg 0.15kg Weight *1 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less r Using the conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY41) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the external wiring change. Moreover, by using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 57 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (18) Specifications comparisons between AY41-UL and QY41P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Maximum load current Maximum inrush current Leakage current (OFF) 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 40VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC 0.1A/point 0.1A/point 1.6A/common 2A/common 0.4A 0.7A 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less 1.75VDC (5mA) at ON time QY41P 2.5VDC (0.1A) Maximum voltage drop Response AY41-UL 1.7VDC (1mA) OFF to ON 2ms or less ON to OFF 2ms or less (resistans load) Surge suppressor Clamp diode 16 points/common Common terminal (common terminal: arrengement TB18,TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 38 points removable terminal External connections block (M3×6 screw) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal External RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 12/24VDC Voltage (10.2 to 40VDC) power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions 20mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.23A (TYP. all points ON) *1 r r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. Pay attention to the common current. 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 1ms or less 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Zener diode 32 points/common (common terminal: A01, A02) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY41P has only one common. ON indication (LED) 40-pin connector (optional) 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) – × × Wiring change is required. *1 × 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio within 5%) Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) 0.105A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.44kg 0.15kg Weight r: Partial change required, Compatibility r Using the conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY41) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the external wiring change. Moreover, by using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 58 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (19) Specifications comparisons between AY42 and QY42P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range AY42 QY42P 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 40VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC r: Partial change required, Compatibility r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 0.1A/point, 2A/common Maximum load current (When placing next to the power supply module: 1.6A/ 0.1A/point, 2A/common common) Maximum inrush current Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON Response time ON to OFF Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator External connections Applicable wire size 0.1mA or less 1.75VDC (5mA) 2ms or less 2ms or less (resistive load) Voltage Current Current consumption External dimensions 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 1ms or less 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Clamp diode Zener diode 32 points/common 32 points/common (common terminal: (common terminal: 1A1,1A2,2A1,2A2) 1A01,1A02,2A01,2A02) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using 32 point switch-over using switch switch Two 40-pin connectors Two 40-pin connectors (solder) (optional) 2 0.3mm tors power Weight 0.1mA or less 2.5VDC (0.1A) Two external wiring connec- Accessory supply 0.7A, 10ms or less 1.7VDC (1mA) OFF to ON Surge suppressor External 0.4A 12/24VDC (10.2 to 40VDC) 40mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.34A (TYP. all points ON) The 40 pin connectors are sold separately. Purchase them separately. 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1 or A6CON4) The 40 pin connectors are sold – × separately. Purchase them separately. 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio within 5%) Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) /common 0.15A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.50kg 0.17kg r 3 - 59 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (20) Specifications comparisons between AY42-S1 and QY42P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range AY42-S1 QY42P 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 40VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC r: Partial change required, Compatibility r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 0.1A/point,2A/common Maximum load current (When placing next to the power supply module: 1.6A/ 0.1A/point, 2A/common common) Maximum inrush current Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON Response time ON to OFF Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator External connections Applicable wire size Voltage Current Current consumption External dimensions 3 - 60 0.1mA or less 1.75VDC (5mA) 0.1ms or less 0.3ms or less (resistans load) 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 1ms or less 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Clamp diode Zener diode 32 points/common 32 points/common (common terminal: (common terminal: 1A1,1A2,2A1,2A2) 1A01,1A02.2A01.2A02) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using 32 point switch-over using switch switch Two 40-pin connectors Two 40-pin connectors (solder) (optional) 0.3mm 2 tors power Weight 0.1mA or less 2.5VDC (0.1A) Two external wiring connec- Accessory supply 0.7A, 10ms or less 1.7VDC (1mA) OFF to ON Surge suppressor External 0.4A 12/24VDC (10.2 to 40VDC) 40mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.29A (TYP. all points ON) r r Response time differs. The 40 pin connectors are sold separately. Purchase them separately. 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1 or A6CON4) The 40 pin connectors are sold – × separately. Purchase them separately. 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio within 5%) 20mA (at 24VDC) /common 0.15A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.50kg 0.17kg r Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (21) Specifications comparisons between AY42-S3 and QY42P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range AY42-S3 QY42P 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 40VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC r: Partial change required, Compatibility r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 0.1A/point,2A/common Maximum load current (When placing next to the power supply module: 1.6A/ 0.1A/point, 2A/common common) Maximum inrush 0.4A/point current 3.5A/fuse Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON Response time ON to OFF Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator Fuse Fuse blow indicator External connections Applicable wire size 2ms or less (resistans load) Voltage Current Current consumption External dimensions 0.1mA or less 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 1ms or less 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Clamp diode Zener diode 32 points/common 32 points/common (common terminal: (common terminal: 1A1,1A2,2A1,2A2) 1A01,1A02,2A01,2A02) 1.6A normal fuse None r Yes – × ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using 32 point switch-over using switch switch Two 40-pin connectors Two 40-pin connectors (solder) (optional) (2 fuse per common) 2 0.3mm connectors power Weight 2ms or less Two external wiring Accessory supply 1.75VDC (5mA) 1.7VDC (1mA) OFF to ON Surge suppressor External 0.1mA or less 2.5VDC (0.1A) 0.7A 10ms or less 12/24VDC (10.2 to 40VDC) 40mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.29A (TYP.all points ON) The fuse-equivalent short circuit protection function is incorporated. Fuse blown is not displayed since the QY42P does not have fuses. The 40 pin connectors are sold separately. Purchase them separately. 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1 or A6CON4) – × 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio within 5%) The 40 pin connectors are sold separately. Purchase separately. Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) /common 0.15A (TYP.all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.50kg 0.17kg r 3 - 61 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (22) Specifications comparisons between AY42-S4 and QY42P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Maximum load current Maximum inrush current AY42-S4 QY42P 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 30VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC 0.1A/point,1.92A/common 0.1A/point, 2A/common 0.4A 10ms or less 0.7A 10ms or less Leakage current (OFF) 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less Maximum voltage drop 2.5VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A at ON Response time 1.0VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A OFF to ON 2ms or less 1ms or less ON to OFF 2ms or less (resistans load) Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator External connections Applicable wire size power supply zener diode 32 points/common 32 points/common (common terminal: ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using 32 point switch-over using switch switch Two 40-pin connectors Two 40-pin connectors (solder) (optional) The 40 pin connectors are sold separately. Purchase them separately. 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1 or A6CON4) The 40 pin connectors are sold – × separately. Voltage – (10.2 to 28.8VDC) × (ripple ratio within 5%) Current – 20mA (at 24VDC) /common (TYP.60% or less 0.15A (TYP.all points ON) simultaneous ON) External dimensions 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.44kg 0.17kg External power supply is not required. × 0.50A 3 - 62 separately. Purchase them 12/24VDC Current consumption Weight applicable. Zener diode 1A01,1A02,2A01,2A02) tors Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not 1ms or less 1A1,1A2,2A1,2A2) 0.3mm2 r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement (rated load,resistans load) (common terminal: Two external wiring connec- Accessory External Photocoupler buid-in r: Partial change required, Compatibility r 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (23) Specifications comparisons between AY50 and QY50 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Maximum load current Maximum inrush current AY50 QY50 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 30VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC 0.5A/point, 2A/common 0.5A/point, 4A/common 7A 10ms or less 3.5A 100ms or less Leakage current (OFF) 0.1mA or less 4A 10ms or less 0.9VDC (TYP.) 0.5A 0.2VDC (TYP.) 0.5A at ON 1.5VDC (MAX.) 0.5A 0.3VDC (MAX.) 0.5A time OFF to ON ON to OFF Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement 2ms or less 2ms or less (resistans load) Varistor (52 to 62V) 8 points/common (common terminal: TB10,TB20) Operation indicator Fuse Fuse blow indicator ON indication (LED) (When fuse blows, LED indi- is blown. Signal is output to a cates it and signal is output to PLC CPU) CPU) RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Voltage power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions Weight *1 12/24VDC (10.2 to 30VDC) 65mA (24VDC TYP. per common) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY50 has only one common. ON indication (LED) (LED is turned ON when fuse R1.25-3,R2-3, External (common terminal: TB18) Yes Applicable crimping terminal 16 points/common Yes 0.75 to 2mm2 the inrush current value differs. zener diode 6.7A (unchangeable) Applicable wire size Carefully select load for use since (rated load,resistans load) (fuse blow capasity : 50A) (M3×6 screw) applicable. 1ms or less 2A fast blow fuse block r Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not 1ms or less (1 fuse common) type 20 points removable terminal External connections r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 0.1mA or less Maximum voltage drop Response r: Partial change required, Compatibility 18 points terminal block (M3×6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) r Connect the fast blow fuse to the external if necessary. The QY50 does not detect fuse r blown unless the external power is supplied. × × Wiring change is required.*1 R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio within 5%) Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) /common 0.115A (TYP.all points ON) 0.08A (TYP.all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.42kg 0.17kg r Wiring space is narrower. Using the conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY50) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the external wiring change. 3 - 63 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (24) Specifications comparisons between AY51 and QY50 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range r: Partial change required, AY51 QY50 Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 30VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY50s when using 17 points or more. Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 0.5A/point,4A/common Maximum load current (When placing next to the power supply module: 3.3A/ 0.5A/point, 4A/common common) Maximum inrush current 4A 10ms or less 4A 10ms or less Leakage current (OFF) 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less Maximum voltage drop 0.9VDC (TYP.) 0.5A 0.2VDC (TYP.) 0.5A at ON Response time 1.5VDC (MAX.) 0.5A 0.3VDC (MAX.) 0.5A OFF to ON 2ms or less 1ms or less ON to OFF 2ms or less (resistans load) Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement Varistor (52 to 62V) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB18,TB36) Operation indicator Fuse ON indication (LED) None 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Zener diode 16 points/common (common terminal: TB18) ON indication (LED) 6.7A (unchangeable) (fuse blow capasity : 50A) Yes Fuse blow indicator – (When fuse blows, LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU) 38 points removable terminal External connections block (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal External RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Voltage power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions Weight 3 - 64 12/24VDC (10.2 to 30VDC) 50mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.23A (TYP. all points ON) 18 points terminal block (M3×6 screw) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio within 5%) Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) /common 0.08A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.53kg 0.17kg r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (25) Specifications comparisons between AY51-S1 and QY50 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Maximum load current Maximum inrush current QY50 Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 30VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC 0.3A/point, 2A/common (1A fuse common) 3A 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less 1VDC (TYP.) 0.3A 0.2VDC (TYP.) 0.5A 1.5VDC (MAX.) 0.3A 0.3VDC (MAX.) 0.5A Response time ON to OFF Surge suppressor 2ms or less 2ms or less (resistans load) Transistor built-in zener diode Use two QY50s when using 17 points or more. Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 4A 10ms or less Maximum voltage drop OFF to ON r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 0.5A/point, 4A/common Leakage current (OFF) at ON r: Partial change required, AY51-S1 1ms or less 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Zener diode 16 points/common Common terminal arrengement (common terminal: 16 points/common TB18,TB36) (common terminal: TB18) 8 points/fuse common Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 1A fast blow fuse Fuse (2fuses per common in 8point units) MP-10 Fuse blow indicator External connections ON indication (LED) 6.7A (unchangeable) (fuse blow capasity : 50A) Yes Yes (LED is turned ON when fuse (When fuse blows, LED is blown. Signal is output to a indicates it and signal is output PLC CPU) to CPU) 38 points removable terminal 18 points terminal block block (M3×6 screw) r Connect the fast blow fuse to the external if necessary. The QY50 does not detect fuse r blown unless the external power is supplied. × (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal External RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Voltage power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions Weight 12/24VDC (10.2 to 30VDC) 100mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.31A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio within 5%) Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) /common 0.08A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.55kg 0.17kg r Wiring space is narrower. 3 - 65 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (26) Specifications comparisons between AY51-UL and QY50 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range r: Partial change required, AY51-UL QY50 Compatibility 32 points 16 points × Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 30VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY50s when using 17 points or more. Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 0.5A/point,4A/common Maximum load current (When placing next to the power supply module: 3.3A/ 0.5A/point, 4A/common common) Maximum inrush current 0.4A 10ms or less 4A 10ms or less Leakage current (OFF) 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less Maximum voltage drop 0.9VDC (TYP.) 0.5A 0.2VDC (TYP.) 0.5A at ON Response time 1.5VDC (MAX.) 0.5A 0.3VDC (MAX.) 0.5A OFF to ON 2ms or less 1ms or less ON to OFF 2ms or less (resistans load) Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement Varistor (52 to 62V) 16 points/common (common terminal: TB18,TB36) Operation indicator Fuse ON indication (LED) None 1ms or less (rated load,resistans load) Zener diode 16 points/common (common terminal: TB18) ON indication (LED) 6.7A (unchangeable) (fuse blow capasity : 50A) Yes Fuse blow indicator – (When fuse blows, LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU) External connections 38 points removable terminal 18 points terminal block block (M3×6 screw) × (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal External RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Voltage power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions Weight 3 - 66 12/24VDC (10.2 to 30VDC) 50mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.23A (TYP.all point ON) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio within 5%) Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) /common 0.08A (TYP.all point ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.53kg 0.17kg r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (27) Specifications comparisons between AY60 and QY68A : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method AY60 16 points r: Partial change required, Compatibility Precautions for replacement 8 points × Use two QY68s when using 9 points (16 points occupied) Photocoupler Photocoupler Rated load voltage 24VDC (12/48V) 5/24VDC r Operating load voltage 21.6 to 26.4VDC range (10.2 to 56VDC) 4.5 to 28.8VDC r 2A/point,5A/common (When placing next to the 2A/point, 8A/module r power supply module: 3A/ current 4A 100ms or less, 8A 10ms or less Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less 1.5VDC (2A) 0.3VDC (MAX.) 2A OFF to ON 2ms or less 3ms or less r time ON to OFF 2ms or less (resistans load) 10ms or less (resistans load) r Varistor (108 to 132V) Zener diode Common terminal arrengement 8 points/common (common terminal: TB10,TB20) Operation indicator Fuse ON indication (LED) Not provided (all points independent) 3.2A fast blow fuse None (Installing a fuse to an external MP-32 cable is recommended.) indicates it and signal is output applicable. common is different, pay attention to the current used in the entire Response time differs. The wiring of terminal block differs r since all the contacts of the QY68A are independent. × Fuses are not built in. *1 Yes Fuse blow indicator Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not ON indication (LED) (2 fuse per common) type (When fuse blows, LED applicable. 8A 10ms or less Response Surge suppressor Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not module. common) Maximum inrush or more. Since the maximum load current per (3A/fuse) Maximum load current ×: Incompatible QY68A – × to CPU) External connections 20 points removable terminal 18 points terminal block block (M3×6 screw) × (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal External power supply RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 Voltage Current 24VDC (21.6 to 26.4VDC) 65mA (24VDC TYP. per common) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) – – Review current capacity when using Current consumption 0.115A (TYP.all point ON) 2 QY68s or more since current 0.11A (TYP.all point ON) consumption is increased in that use. External dimensions Weight *1 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.64kg 0.14kg r Wiring space is narrower. Mount a fuse on every external terminal to prevent the external device and module deferioration upon load short circuit. Also, configure an external circuit when displaying fuse blown is required. 3 - 67 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (28) Specifications comparisons between AY60E and QY68A : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method AY60E 16 points r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible QY68A Compatibility Precautions for replacement 8 points × Use two QY68s when using 9 points (16 points occupied) Photocoupler Photocoupler Rated load voltage 24VDC (12/48V) 5/24VDC Operating load voltage 21.6 to 26.4VDC range (10.2 to 56VDC) 4.5 to 28.8VDC r r or more. Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. Voltage over 28.8 VDC is not applicable. 12/24VDC 2A/points Since the maximum load current per 48VDC 0.8A/points Maximum load current 5A/common 2A/points (When placing next to the 8A/unit r common is different, pay attention to the current used in the entire module. power supply module: 3A/ common) Maximum inrush 4A 100ms or less current 8A 10ms or less Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON 8A 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less 1.5VDC (2A) 0.3VDC (MAX.) 2A Response OFF to ON 2ms or less 3ms or less r time ON to OFF 2ms or less (resistans load) 10ms or less (resistans load) r Surge suppression diode Zener diode Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement 8 points/common (common terminal: TB10,TB20) 5A fast blow fuse Fuse (2 fuse per common) type Not provided (all points independent) The wiring of terminal block differs r Fuse blow indicator indicates it signal is output to since all the contacts of the QY68A are independent. None (Installing a fuse to an external × cable is recommended.) Fuses are not built in. *1 Yes (When fuse is blows, LED Response time differs. – × CPU) Operation indicator External connections ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 20 points removable terminal 18 points terminal block block (M3×6 screw) × (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3 terminal RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) Review current capacity when using Current consumption 0.115A (TYP.all points ON) 0.11A (TYP.all points ON) r 2 QX28s or more since current consumption is increased in that use. External dimensions Weight *1 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.63kg 0.14kg Wiring space is narrower. Mount a fuse on every external terminal to prevent external devices and modules from burning out upon load short circuit. Also, configure an external circuit when fuse blown display is necessary. 3 - 68 r 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (29) Specifications comparisons between AY60S and QY68A : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method AY60S 16 points r: Partial change required, QY68A Compatibility 8 points × (16 points occupied) Photocoupler Photocoupler Rated load voltage 24/48VDC (12V) 5/24VDC r Operating load voltage 21.6 to 52.8VDC range (10.2 to 52.8VDC) 4.5 to 28.8VDC r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY68As when using 9 points or more. Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable. Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable. 2A/ points,6.4A/ common (5A/ fuse) Maximum load current (When placing next to the 2A/ points, 8A/unit power supply module: 5A/ common) Maximum inrush current 4A 100ms or less, 8A 10ms or less Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON 8A 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less 1VDC (2A) 0.3VDC (MAX.) 2A Response OFF to ON 1ms or less 3ms or less r time ON to OFF 3ms or less (resistive load) 10ms or less (resistive load) r Varistor (90 to 110V) Zener diode Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator Fuse 8 points/common (common terminal: TB10,TB20) ON indication (LED) Not provided (all points independent) The wiring of terminal block differs r are independent. 5A fast blow fuse None (Installing a fuse to an external MP-50 cable is recommended.) × Fuses are not built in. *1 Yes Fuse blow indicator indicates it signal is output to since all the contacts of the QY68A ON indication (LED) (2 fuse per common) type (When fuse is blows, LED Response time differs. – × CPU) External connections 20 points removable terminal 18 points terminal block block (M3×6 screw) × (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping R1.25-3,R2-3, terminal RAV1.25-3,RAV2-3 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) Since more current is consumed, the Current consumption 0.075A (TYP.all points ON) 0.11A (TYP.all points ON) current capacity must be reexamined. External dimensions Weight *1 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76(D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.66kg 0.14kg r Wiring space is narrower. Mount a fuse on every external terminal to prevent external devices and modules from burning out upon load short circuit. Also, configure an external circuit when fuse blown display is necessary. 3 - 69 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (30) Specifications comparisons between AY70 and QY70 : Compatible, Specification AY70 QY70 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 5/12VDC 5/12VDC 4.5 to 15VDC 4.5 to 14.4VDC 16mA/ point 16mA/ point 128mA/ common 256mA/ common 50mA 10ms 40mA 10ms of less VOH: 3.5VDC VOH: 3.5VDC (Vcc = 5VDC, IOH = 0.4mA) (Vcc = 5VDC, IOH = 0.4mA) Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Maximum load current Maximum inrush current Output voltage at OFF r: Partial change required, Compatibility r r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Voltage over 14.4VDC is not applicable. Carefully select load for use since the inrush current value differs. *1 Check the input specifications of an Maximum voltage drop VOL: 0.2VDC at ON (IOL: 16mA) VOL: 0.3VDC r external equipment to be connected since the maximum voltage drop is bigger when turning on. Response time OFF to ON 1ms or less ON to OFF 1ms or less Common terminal arrengement 8 points/common (Common terminal: TB10,TB20) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) Fuse None 0.5ms or less 0.5ms of less (resistive load) 16 points/common (Common terminal: TB18) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QX40 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 1.6A (Unchangeable) (Fuse blow capacity: 50A) Yes Fuse blow indicator (LED is turned ON when fuse is – blowns. Signal is output to a PLC CPU) 20 points removable terminal External connections block (M3×6 screw) Applicable wire size External 0.75 to 5/12VDC Voltage (4.5 to 15VDC) power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm(0.11 inch)OD max.) Wiring change is required. *1 × r (ripple ratio witin 5%) 90mA (at 12VDC) (MAX all points ON) 0.10A (TYP. all points ON) × 5/12VDC (4.5 to 14.4V) 55mA Voltage over 14.4VDC is not applicable. 0.095A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84(H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.36kg 0.14kg r Wiring space is narrower. The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY40) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 70 (M3×6 screw) (12VDC TYP. per common) Weight *1 2mm2 18 points terminal block 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (31) Specifications comparisons between AY71 and QY71 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range AY71 QY71 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 5/12VDC 5/12VDC 4.5 to 15VDC 4.5 to 15VDC 16mA/ point Maximum load current 256mA/ common (Sink loading) Maximum inrush Output voltage at OFF ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 16mA/ point 512mA/ common 50mA 10ms 40mA 10ms or less VOH: 3.5VDC VOH: 3.5VDC (Vcc = 5VDC, IOH = 0.4mA) (Vcc = 5VDC, IOH = 0.4mA) current r: Partial change required, Compatibility r Carefully select load for use since the inrush current value differs. *1 Check the input specifications of an Maximum voltage drop VOL: 0.2VDC at ON (IOL: 16mA) VOL: 0.3VDC r external equipment to be connected since the maximum voltage drop is bigger when turning on. Response time OFF to ON 1ms or less ON to OFF 1ms or less Common terminal arrengement 16 points/common (Common terminal: TB18,TB36) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) Fuse None 0.5ms or less 0.5ms of less (resistive load) 32 points/common (Common terminal: A01, A02) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY71 has only one common. ON indication (LED) 1.6A (Unchangeable) (Fuse blow capacity: 50A) Yes Fuse blow indicator – (When fuse is blows, LED indicates it signal is output to CPU) External connections 38 points removable terminal block (M3×6 screw) 40-pin connetctor (optional) 2 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size External 5/12VDC Voltage (4.5 to 15VDC) power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions (for A6CON1, or A6CON4) r (ripple ratio witin 5%) 100mA 170mA (at 12VDC) (MAX all points ON) 0.20A (TYP. all points ON) Wiring change is required. *1 × 5/12VDC (4.5 to 15VDC) (12VDC TYP. per common) Voltage over 14.4VDC is not applicable. 0.15A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.44kg 0.14kg Weight *1 0.3mm (AWG#22) or less × r The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY41) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 71 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (32) Specifications comparisons between AY72 and QY71 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range QY71 Compatibility 64 points 32 points × Photocoupler Photocoupler 5/12VDC 5/12VDC 4.5 to 15VDC 4.5 to 15VDC 16mA/ point, Maximum load current 512mA/ common (Sink loading) Maximum inrush current Output voltage at OFF r: Partial change required, AY72 ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Use two QY71s when using 33 points or more. 16mA/ point, 512mA/ common 50mA 10ms 40mA 10ms or less VOH: 3.5VDC VOH: 3.5VDC (Vcc = 5VDC, IOH = 0.4mA) (Vcc=5VDC, IOH=0.4mA) r Carefully select load for use since the inrush current value differs. *1 Check the input specifications of an Maximum voltage drop VOL: 0.2VDC at ON (IOL = 16mA) VOL: 0.3VDC r external equipment to be connected since the maximum voltage drop is bigger when turning on. Response time OFF to ON 1ms or less ON to OFF 1ms or less Common terminal arrengement 32 points/common (Common terminal: 1A1,1A2,2A1,2A2) Operation indicator Fuse ON indication (LED) None 0.5ms or less 0.5ms of less (resistive load) 32 points/common (Common terminal: A01, A02) ON indication (LED) 1.6A (Unchangeable) (Fuse blow capacity: 50A) Yes Fuse blow indicator – (When fuse is blows, LED indicates it signal is output to CPU) The 40 pin connector is sold External connections Two 40-pin connectors (solder) separately. 40-pin connetctor (optional) • 32 points or less: 1pcs. • 33 points or more: 2pcs. Applicable wire size 0.3mm2 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, or A6CON4) The 40 pin connector is sold Two external wiring connec- Accessory External tors Voltage power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions Weight 3 - 72 5/12VDC (4.5 to 15VDC) None 5/12VDC (4.5 to 15VDC) r (ripple ratio witin 5%) 300mA 170mA (at 12VDC) (12VDC TYP. 1-common ON) (MAX all points ON) 0.30A (TYP. all points ON) × 0.15A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17(D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.47kg 0.14kg r separately. • 32 points or less: 1pcs. • 33 points or more: 2pcs. Voltage over 14.4VDC is not applicable. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (33) Specifications comparisons between AY80 and QY80 : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Maximum load current Maximum inrush current 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 30VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC 0.5A/ point, 0.5A/ point, 2A/ common 4A/ common 3.5A 100ms or less Maximum voltage drop at ON time QY80 7A 10ms or less Leakage current (OFF) Response AY80 0.1mA or less 1.5VDC (MAX.) 0.5A OFF to ON Surge suppressor Common terminal arrengement (resistive load) (rated load, resistive load) Varistor (52 to 62V) Zener diode Fuse Fuse blow indicator External connections ON indication (LED) 16 points/common (Common terminal: TB17) 6.7A (Unchangeable) common) type (Fuse blow capacity: 50A) Yes Yes (When fuse is blows, LED (When fuse is blows, LED indicates it’s signal is output to indicates it’s signal is output to CPU) CPU) 20 points removable terminal 18 points terminal block block (M3×6 screw) (M3×6 screw) 2 0.75 to 2mm2 External 12/24VDC Voltage (10.2 to 30VDC) power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions 60mA (24VDC TYP. 1-common ON) 0.115A (TYP. all points ON) *1 0.3 to 0.75mm core (2.8mm (0.11 inch)OD max.) the inrush current value differs. *1 For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY80 has only one common. r r When necessary, connect a fuse externally. The QY80 does not detect fuse blown without external power supply. × Wiring change is required. *1 × 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio witin 5%) Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable. 20mA (at 24VDC) 0.08A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76(D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.42kg 0.17kg Weight Carefully select load for use since ON indication (LED) 2A fast blow fuse (1 fuse per Applicable wire size applicable. 0.2VDC (TYP.) 0.5A 1ms or less (Common terminal: r Voltage over 28.8VDC is not 0.3VDC (MAX.) 0.5A 1ms or less 8 points/common r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 0.1mA or less 2ms or less TB9,TB19) Operation indicator 4A 10ms or less 2ms or less ON to OFF r: Partial change required, Compatibility r Wiring space is narrower. The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY80) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. 3 - 73 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (34) Specifications comparisons between AY81 and QY81P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range AY81 QY81P 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 30VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC r: Partial change required, Compatibility r 0.5A/ point,4A/ common Maximum load current (When placing next to the 0.1A/ point, power supply module: 3A/ 2A/ common current Leakage current (OFF) 4A 10ms or less 0.7A 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable. Carefully select load for use since r the maximum load current per point is lowered. common) Maximum inrush ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement r Carefully select load for use since the inrush current value differs. Because different values for Maximum voltage drop at ON 1.5VDC (MAX.) 0.5A 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A r maximum voltage drop are given, care should be taken to select loads to be used. Response time OFF to ON 2ms or less ON to OFF Common terminal arrengement 1ms or less 2ms or less 1ms or less (resistive load) (rated load, resistive load) 16 points/common (Common terminal: TB17,TB35) Surge suppressor Varistor (52 to 62V) Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 32 points/common (Common terminal: 17,18,36) For wiring, a different voltage cannot r be applied to each common since the QY81P has only one common. Zener diode ON indication (LED) Yes (overheat protection function, overload protection function) Protection None External connections 38 points removable terminal 37-pin D-subconnector block (M3×6 screw) (optional) 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size External 12/24VDC Voltage (10.2 to 30VDC) power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions 50mA (24VDC TYP. 1-common ON) 0.23A (TYP. all points ON) 0.3mm 2 (for A6CON1E) × Wiring change is required. *1 × 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio witin 5%) Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable. 40mA (at 24VDC) 0.095A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 131 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 5.16 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.53kg 0.15kg Weight *1 • Overheat protection function is activated in increments of 2 points. • Overload protection function is activated in increments of 1 point. r The conversion adapter (ERNT-AQTY81) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing external wiring. Moreover, by using connectors/terminal block converter modules (A6TBXY36-E, etc.) conversion to the terminal block is possible. 3 - 74 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (35) Specifications comparisons between AY82-EP and QY81P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range QY81P Compatibility 64 points 32 points × Photocoupler Photocoupler 12/24VDC 12/24VDC 10.2 to 26.4VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC 0.1A/ point Maximum load current current 0.7A to 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less Maximum voltage drop at ON Response time 3.5VDC (0.1A) 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 2.5VDC (0.1A TYP.) 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A OFF to ON 0.5ms or less ON to OFF Common terminal arrengement 1.5ms or less 32 points/common (Common terminal: 1-17, 1-18,1-36,2-17,2-18,2-36) Use two QY81Ps when using 33 points or more. 2A/ common No limit (Short protect) Leakage current (OFF) ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 0.1A/ point, 0.04A/ point (60%ON, 55 °C) Maximum inrush r: Partial change required, AY82-EP 1ms or less 1ms or less (rated load, resistive load) r Carefully select load for use since the inrush current value differs. *1 r r Response time differs. 32 points/common (Common terminal: 17,18,36) Surge suppressor Surge suppression diode Zener diode Operation indicator ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) Yes (Overheat protection func. and short-circuit protection func.) • Overheat protection func. is detected in 1 point unit. When Overheat protection func. occurs at an 1 point of 1 common, output of all points for corresponded common terminal is turned. OFF. Protection Protection detection display Protection func. reset Yes (overheat protection function, overload protection function) • Overheat protection function is activated in increments of 2 points. • Overload protection function is activated in increments of 1 point. None None (No signal output to PLC CPU) (No signal output to PLC CPU) Automatic reset Automatic reset (reset by canceling Overheat (reset by canceling Overheat protection func.) protection func.) Two 37-pin connectors 37-pin D-subconnector (solder) (optional) The 40 pin connector is sold External connections Applicable wire size 0.3mm2 separately. • 32 points or less: 1pcs. • 33 points or more: 2pcs. 0.3mm2 (for A6CON1E) The 40 pin connector is sold Two external wiring connec- Accessory External tors Voltage power supply Current Current consumption External dimensions Weight 12/24VDC (10.2 to 30VDC) 50mA (24VDC TYP. 1-common ON) 0.29A (TYP. all points ON) None × 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) r (ripple ratio witin 5%) separately. • 32 points or less: 1pcs. • 33 points or more: 2pcs. Voltage of 28.8VDC or more is not allowed. 40mA (at 24VDC) 0.095A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 106 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.17 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.58kg 0.15kg r 3 - 75 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3.2.3 Specifications Comparisons Between I/O Modules (1) Specifications comparisons between AH42 and QH42P : Compatible, Specification Number of input points Isolation method Input type AH42 QH42P 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Sink type r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Sink type (positive common) Rated input voltage 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not aplicable. Rated input current Approx. 3mA/Approx. 7mA Approx. 4mA r Reduced. *1 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio witin 5%) (ripple ratio witin 5%) r 12VDC are not aplicable. 60% simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart. *2 9.5VDC or more/3mA or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not aplicable. 6VDC or less/1.5mA or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not aplicable. Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *1 Operating voltage range Maximum Input specification simultaneous input point ON voltage/ON current OFF voltage/OFF current Input resistance Approx. 3.3kΩ 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON 10ms or less (24VDC) Response initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF 10ms or less (24VDC) Use initial value (10ms) for the /70ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters. Use initial value (10ms) for the /70ms or less input response time of (CPU parameter setting) parameters. initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrengement (Common terminal: 1B1,1B2) Number of output points Isolation method 1B02) 32 points 32 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Sink type Sink type Rated load voltage 12/24VDC 12-24VDC Operating voltage 10.2 to 40VDC 10.2 to 28.8VDC 0.1A/1point, 1A/1 common 0.1A/1 point, 2A/1 common 0.4A 10ms or less 0.7A 10ms or less 0.1mA or less 0.1mA or less Max. inrush current Output specification 32 points/common (Common terminal: 1B01, Output type range Leakage current (OFF) Maximum voltage drop at ON Response time ON to OFF Common terminal arrengement External 1.75VDC (5mA) 1ms or less 1ms or less (resistive load) (rated load, resistive load) 32 points/common Voltage Current Operation indicator 12/24VDC (10.2 to 40VDC) 0.04A (24VDC TYP.) Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable. 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 2ms or less Clamp diode r 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 2ms or less (common terminal: 2A1,2A2) power supply 2.5VDC (0.1A) 1.7VDC (1mA) OFF to ON Surge suppressor 3 - 76 32 points/common Zener diode 32 points/common (common terminal: 2A01, 2A02) 12-24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC ripple ratio within 5%) 0.015A (24VDC) /1 common (MAX all points ON) ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) 32 point switch-over using 32 point switch-over using switch switch r Voltage over 28.8VDC is not applicable. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT Specification External connections AH42 40pin connector × 2 Applicable wire size Accessory QH42P 0.3mm 2 40pin connector × 2 (soldering type) (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) The two 40 pin connectors are None × sold separately. Purchase separately. (I/O assignment: output 64 (I/O assignment: input/output points) conposite) Current consumption 0.25A (TYP. all points ON) 0.13A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.70kg 0.20kg *1 Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QH42P. *2 The following figure shows derating. *3 separately. 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less Occupied points 100 90 80 ON ratio 70 60 50 40 0 separately. Purchase (option) 32 points Weight Precautions for replacement The 40 pin connectors are sold 40pin connector × 2 64 points External dimensions Compatibility Output number (Y ) differs. *3 × r 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature Modify the output number used in the program. 3 - 77 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (2) Specifications comparisons between A42XY and QX42/QY42P (a) Specifications comparisons between A42XY (input part) and QX42 : Compatible, Specification Number of input points Isolation method A42XY (input specification) 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Dynamic scan of 8 input type inputs × 8 Rated input voltage QX42 Static × OFF voltage/OFF current input resistance Set the static. 12/24VDC 24VDC (20.4 to 28.8VDC) (ripple ratio witin 5%) (ripple ratio witin 5%) 60% simultaneously ON Refer to the deratine chart *2 r 7VDC or more 19V or more/3mA or more r 12VDC are not aplicable. 3VDC or more 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not aplicable. Approx. 5.6kΩ r Increased. *2 point ON voltage/ON current ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement (10.2 to 26.4VDC) Maximum simultaneous input r: Partial change required, Compatibility Approx. 2.4kΩ Use within the range shown in the derating figure. 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms OFF to ON /70ms or less 16ms or less Response initial setting is 10ms time 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms ON to OFF Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. /70ms or less 16ms or less Use initial value (10ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. initial setting is 10ms Common terminal arrengement External connections Applicable wire size power supply (Common terminal: ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) Batch of 8 inputs selected by 32 point switch-over using rotary switch. switch input: 16pin connector 40pin connector 0.3mm2 (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) Voltage (10.2 to 26.4VDC) – – – – (ripple ratio witin 5%) Current 55mA TYP. The number of occupied points is (output I/O assignment: 64 points) Current consumption External dimensions Weight 128 points (64points × 2 = 128 64 points (I/O assignment: input) points) when using both modules of the QX42 and QY42. 0.11A TYP. 0.09A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 119 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84(H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.69 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.60kg 0.18kg The following figure shows derating. 100 90 ON 80 ratio 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 3 - 78 Wiring change is required. 12/24VDC Occupied points *2 × 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less 64 points *1 – 1B01,1B02,2B01,2B02) Operation indicator External 32 points/common – 24VDC 26.4VDC 28.8VDC 10 20 30 40 50 55 Ambient temperature Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QX40. r 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (b) Specifications comparisons between A42XY (output part) and QY42P : Compatible, Specification Number of output points Isolation method A42XY (Output specification) QY42P 64 points 64 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Dynamic scan of 8 Output type input 8 12/24VDC Rated load voltage (10.2 to 26.4VDC) (ripple ratio witin 5%) Static r: Partial change required, Compatibility × ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Set the static. 12/24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) 50mA per point Max. output current (built in limiting resistor (1kΩ) 0.1A/ point, 2A/ common not used) Max. voltage drop at ON 1V on the sink side Max. simultaneously time 100% simultanellously ON resistor (50 mA/point) OFF to ON 16ms or less 1ms or less ON to OFF 16ms or less Common terminal arrengement External connections Applicable wire size power supply 32 points/common – (Common terminal: Voltage Current ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) Batch of 8 inputs selected by 32 point switch-over using rotary switch. switch Output: 32pin connector 40pin connector 0.3mm 2 – Occupied points 12-24VDC (10.2 to 28.8VDC) (ripple ratio witin 5%) (ripple ratio witin 5%) 180mA TYP. 0.02A (24VDC) / common points) Current consumption External dimensions 0.11A TYP. Wiring change is required. (For A6CON1 or A6CON4) (10.2 to 26.4VDC) (I/O assignment: output 64 × 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less 12/24VDC 64 points Weight 1ms or less (rated load, resistive load) 1A01,1A02,2A01,2A02) Operation indicator External 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 60% when built-in 1kΩ limiting ON Response 1.5V on the source side (built in limiting resistor not used) The number of occupied points is 128 points (64points × 2 = 128 64 points (I/O assignment: output ) points) when using both modules of the QX42 and QY42. 0.15A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 119 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.60kg 0.17kg r Reviewing power supply capacity is required. r 3 - 79 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3.2.4 Specifications Comparisons Interrupt Module (1) Specifications comparisons between AI61 and QI60 : Compatible, Specification Number of interrupt input points Isolation method Rated input voltage Rated input current Operating voltage range Maximum simultaneous input point r: Partial change required, QI60 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler 12VDC/24VDC 24VDC r 12VDC are not aplicable. Approx. 6mA r Reduced. *1 r 12VDC are not aplicable. 6mA (12VDC) 14mA (24VDC) 10.2 to 26.4VDC 20.4 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio witin 5%) 100% (16/ common) 100% (16/ common) simultanellously ON simultanellously ON Compatibility ×: Incompatible AI61 Precautions for replacement ON voltage 9V or more 19V or more/4.0mA or more r 12VDC are not aplicable. OFF voltage 4V or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r 12VDC are not aplicable. Approx. 2.4kΩ Approx. 3.9kΩ r Increased. *1 Input resistance 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms/ OFF to ON 0.2ms or less 1ms or less Use initial value (0.2ms) for the input response time of parameters. (CPU parameter setting) Initial setting is 0.2ms Response time 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms/ ON to OFF 0.2ms or less 1ms or less Use initial value (0.2ms) for the input (CPU parameter setting) response time of parameters. Initial setting is 0.2ms Common terminal arrengement Operation indicator 16 points/common (Common terminal: TB9,TB18) ON indication (LED) 20 points removable External connections terminal block (M3 × 6 screws) Applicable wire size 0.75 to 1.5mm2 1.25-3,1.25-YS3A, Applicable crimping terminal 2-S3, 2-YS3A V1.25-3,V1.25-YS3A, V2-S3,V2-YS3A Occupied points Current consumption External dimensions Weight *1 3 - 80 16 points/common (Common terminal: TB17) ON indication (LED) 18 points terminal block (M3×6 screws) 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11 inch) OD max.) × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 32 points (I/O assignment: 16 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent 32 points) Interrupt) 0.14A (TYP. all points ON) × × I/O assignment differs. 0.06A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.40kg 0.20kg Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QI60. r Wiring space is narrower. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (2) Specifications comparisons between AI61-S1 and QI60 : Compatible, Specification Number of interrupt input points Isolation method AI61-S1 QI60 16 points 16 points Photocoupler Photocoupler Rated input voltage 24VDC 24VDC Rated input current 14mA Approx. 6mA Operating voltage range Maximum simultaneous input point ON voltage OFF voltage Input resistance 21.6 to 26.4VDC r 100% (16/ common) simultaneously ON simultaneously ON 16V or more 19V or more/4.0mA or more r 9V or less 11V or less/1.7mA or less r Approx. 2.4kΩ Approx. 3.9kΩ r /1ms or less (CPU parameter setting) time 2ms or less, 8ms or less /1ms or less (CPU parameter setting) arrengement Operation indicator External connections Applicable wire size 16 points/common (Common terminal: TB9,TB18) Applicable crimping terminal ON indication (LED) 18points terminal block block (M3×6 screw) (M3×6 screw) 2-S3,2-YS3A V1.25-3,V1.25-YS3A, V2-S3,V2-YS3A Occupied points Current consumption External dimensions Weight *1 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm(0.11 inch)OD max.) Set lms to the input response time. × × Wiring change is required. R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals × cannot be used) 32 points (I/O assignment: 16 points (I/O assignment: Interrupt 32 points) Intelligent) 0.14A (TYP. all points ON) time in Parameter is not allowed. 16 points/common 20points removable terminal 1.25-3,1.25-YS3A, time in Parameter is not allowed. (Common terminal: TB17) ON indication (LED) 0.75 to 1.5mm2 increased. *1 Increased. *1 Setting 2ms or more input response r Initial setting is 0.2ms Common terminal *1 The OFF voltage has been Set lms to the input response time. 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms ON to OFF The ON voltage has been increased. Setting 2ms or more input response r Initial setting is 0.2ms Response Reduced. *1 (ripple ratio witin 5%) 100% (16/ common) 2ms or less, 8ms or less ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement 20.4 to 28.8VDC 0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms OFF to ON r: Partial change required, Compatibility × I/O assignment differs. r Wiring space is narrower. 0.06A (TYP. all points ON) 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.40kg 0.20kg Check the specifications of sensor or switch to connect to the QI60. 3 - 81 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3.2.5 Blanking Module and Dummy Module Specifications Comparisons Between (1) Specifications comparisons between AG60 and QG60 : Compatible, Specification AG60 QG60 16 points 16 points Vacant 16 points Vacant 16 points r: Partial change required, Compatibility ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Number of I/O number occupied points I/O assignment classification Application Use for parts without I/O module Mounted to the slot where no I/O (especially, for parts of empty slot module is mounted (especially between modules) as dust control. between modules) for dust controll. External 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm dimensions (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) Weight 0.17kg r 0.07kg (2) Specifications comparisons between AG62 and QG60 : Compatible, Specification Number of I/O number occupied points I/O assignment classification Application AG62 r: Partial change required, QG60 Compatibility 16 points r ×: Incompatible Precautions for replacement Max. 64 points (Able to select from 16 points, 32 points, 48 points and 64 points by using the switch on module surface.) Depends on the switch setting for the number of input occupied points (16 points, 32 points, 48 points, 64 Set the number of occupied points Vacant 16 points r with the I/O assignment of parameter settings. points) Reserve 16 points, 32 points, 48 Mounted to the slot where no I/O points or 64 points in advance for the module is mounted (especially future need of adding I/O. between modules) for dust controll. r The provided simulation switches for Other 16points from the first I/O number functions allows the input on/off without an – × 0.07A – r 250 (H) × 37.5 (W) × 121 (D) mm 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 90 (D) mm (9.84 (H) × 1.48 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86(H) × 1.08 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.3kg 0.07kg external switch. Current consumption External dimensions Weight 3 - 82 r Configure with external switches and input modules. 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT íuä²Ç¶éûÇÃóØà”ì_ 3.3 Precautions for I/O Module Replacement (1) Wiring (a) Size of wire and crimping terminal The module and terminal block of the Q series are smaller than the A series, therefore the applicable size of wire and crimping terminal for terminal blocks differ between the two series. For this reason, use the wire and crimping terminal compatible with the specifications of the Q series I/O module when replacing with Q the series. The upgrade tool (Conversion adapter) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. omits the procedure of changing wiring. (Connection change for power supply and common terminals is required. Also, the conversion adapter fixing plate is necessary when using the conversion adapter.) As the Q series is a smaller model, wiring space on terminal blocks is narrower. Pay much attention in wiring. (b) Change from terminal block to connecter The 32-point I/O modules of the A series uses terminal blocks while that of Q series uses connecters. When using a 32-point I/O module of the Q series shift to the wiring using connecters or convert the connecters to terminal blocks with the following methods. • Use the conversion module for the connecters and terminal block . • Use the upgrade tool (Conversion adapter)* manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. (2) Connecter for external wiring External wiring connecters are not included in a package of the 32 and 64 points I/O module of the Q series. Purchase the necessary number of the connecters (A6CON ) separately. (3) Precautions for input modules (a) Specifications change of rated input current Check the specifications of sensors and switches since some of the Q series input modules support lower rated input current than those of the A series. (b) Specifications change of OFF current Check the specifications of sensors and switches since some of the Q series input modules support lower OFF current than those of the A series. (c) Specifications change of maximum simultaneous on input point Check the specifications of sensors and switches since some of the Q series input modules have less maximum simultaneous on input points than those of the A series. Refer to the derating diagram and use within the range shown in the diagram when replacing with the Q series. (d) Specifications change of rated voltage value The QX4 Use QX7 and the QX8 at 12VDC. type DC input module of the Q series are dedicated to DC24V. 3 - 83 3 I/O MODULE REPLACEMENT (e) Specifications change of response time For the Q series DC input modules, the I/O response time can be set with the parameter. Set the I/O response time with parameters adjusting it to the response time of the A series input module. (f) Specifications change of common terminal arrangement. The common terminal arrangement may differ between the A series and Q series. Pay attention when applying a different voltage to each common. (4) Precautions for output module (a) Specifications change of output current value Some of the Q series output modules support lower output current than those of the A series. Check the specification of the load side when using the Q series output module with smaller output current. (b) Specifications change of common terminal arrangement The common terminal arrangement may differ between the A series and Q series. Pay attention when applying a different voltage to each common. (c) Specifications change of common maximum load current Check the maximum load current for one common before use, since the current for one common may differ between the A and Q series. 3 - 84 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS 4 4.1 List of Alternative Models for Power Supply Module A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Model Q series alternative models Model Remark (restrictions) 1)External wiring: Changed A61P Q61P-A1/A2 2)Number of slots: Not changed 3)Specifications: Current capacity is reduced. 1)External wiring: Changed A62P Q62P 2)Number of slots: Not changed 3)Specifications: Current capacity is reduced. 1)External wiring: Changed A63P Q63P 2)Number of slots: Not changed 3)Specifications: Current capacity is reduced. Power supply module 1)External wiring: Changed A61PEU Q61P-A1/A2 2)Number of slots: Not changed 3)Specifications: Current capacity is reduced. 1)External wiring: Changed A62PEU Q62P 2)Number of slots: Not changed 3)Specifications: Current capacity is reduced. A68P None A61P-UL Q61P-A1/A2 General-purpose switching power supply (For ± 15VDC) Current capacity is reduced. 4-1 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS 4.2 Power Supply Module Specifications Comparisons (1) Specifications comparisons between A61P(-UL) and Q61P-A1/A2 : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Specification A61P(-UL) Q61P-A1/A2 100-120VAC+10%-15% A1: 100-120VAC+10%-15% (85 to 132VAC) (85 to 132VAC) 200-240VAC+10%-15% A2: 200-240VAC+10%-15% (170 to 264VAC) (170 to 264VAC) 50/60Hz ± 5% 50/60Hz ± 5% 5% or less 5% or less 130VA 105VA 20A within 8ms 20A within 8ms 5VDC 8A 6A × current 24VDC – – – Overcurrent 5VDC 8.8A or more 6.6A or more protection 24VDC – – Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V protection 24VDC Input power supply Input frequency Input voltage distortion Max. input apparent power Inrush current Rated output Efficiency Power indicator – – 65% or more 70% or more M4 × 0.7 × 6 M3.5 screws Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.75 to 2mm2 R1.25-4, R2-4 RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4 Applicable tightening External dimensions Noise durability of entire system. – – × Wiring change required. 66 to 89N·cm × (9.84 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.98 0.31 within 20ms within 20ms Noise voltage 1500Vp-p • By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency • Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV power failure period Confirm the current consumption RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5 98(H) × 55.2(W) × 90(D) mm Allowable momentary 200-240VAC. Wiring change required. 250(H) × 55(W) × 121(D) mm Weight (kg) Use the Q61P-A2 at voltages of × 98 to 137N·cm torque r 100-120VAC. (5VDC output: ON) Terminal screw size terminal r Precautions for replacement Use the Q61P-A1 at voltages of LED indication Power LED display Applicable crimping Compatibility Tighten within the applicable tightening torque. r Across external AC terminal batch and ground: 1500VAC for Across inputs/LG and outputs/ Dielectric withstand 1 minute FG voltage Across external DC terminal 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m batch and ground: 500VAC for 1 (6562 ft.)) minute Across inputs and outputs (LG Across external AC terminal Insulation resistance batch and ground 5MΩ or more by insulation resistance tester. and FG separated), across inputs and LG/FG, across outputs and FG/LG 10MΩ or more by insulation resistance tester Fuses are not included in Spare fuse: 1 Accessory Short chip for applied voltage select terminal: 1 accessories since they are not None × replaceable, nor are short chip since it is unnecessary to switch operating voltage. 4-2 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS (2) Specifications comparisons between A62P and Q62P : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Specification A62P Q62P Compatibility Precautions for replacement 100-120VAC+10%-15% Input power supply (85 to 132VAC) 100-240VAC+10%-15% 200-240VAC+10%-15% (85 to 264VAC) (170 to 264VAC) Input frequency Input voltage distortion Max. input apparent power Inrush current Rated output current 50/60Hz ± 5% 50/60Hz ± 5% 5% or less 5% or less 155VA 105VA 20A within 8ms 20A within 8ms 5VDC 5A 3A × 24VDC 0.8A 0.6A × Overcurrent 5VDC 5.5A or more 3.3A or more protection 24VDC 1.2A or more 0.66A or more Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V protection 24VDC – – 65% or more 65% or more Efficiency Power indicator M4 × 0.7 × 6 M3.5 screws Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.75 to 2mm2 R1.25-4, R2-4 RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4 Applicable tightening External dimensions Wiring change required. RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5 × Wiring change required. 66 to 89N·cm × Tighten within the applicable 250(H) × 55(W) × 121(D) mm 98(H) × 55.2(W) × 90(D) mm (9.84 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.94 0.39 within 20ms within 20ms Noise voltage 1500Vp-p • By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency • Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV Weight (kg) Allowable momentary power failure period Noise durability × 48 to 137N·cm torque – (5VDC output: ON) Terminal screw size terminal of entire system. LED indication Power LED display Applicable crimping Confirm the current consumption tightening torque. r Across external AC terminal batch and ground: 1500VAC for Across inputs/LG and outputs/ Dielectric withstand 1 minute FG voltage Across external DC terminal 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m batch and ground: 500VAC for 1 (6562 ft.)) minute Across inputs and outputs (LG Across external AC terminal Insulation resistance batch and ground 5MΩ or more by insulation resistance tester. and FG separated), across inputs and LG/FG, across outputs and FG/LG 10MΩ or more by insulation resistance tester Fuses are not included in Spare fuse: 1 Accessory Short chip for applied voltage select terminal: 1 accessories since they are not None × replaceable, nor are short chip since it is unnecessary to switch operating voltage. 4-3 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS (3) Specifications comparisons between A63P and Q63P : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Specification Input power supply A63P Q63P 24VDC+30%-35% 24VDC+30%-35% (15.6 to 31.2VDC) (15.6 to 31.2VDC) Compatibility Input frequency – – – Input voltage distortion – – – Max. input apparent 65W 45W 100A within 1ms 100A within 1ms at 24VDC input 5VDC 8A 6A × current 24VDC – – – Overcurrent 5VDC 8.5A or more 6.6A or more protection 24VDC – – Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V protection 24VDC Inrush current Rated output Efficiency Power indicator – – 65% or more 70% or more Power LED display M4 × 0.7 × 6 M3.5 screws 0.75 to 2mm2 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable tightening torque External dimensions Weight (kg) Allowable momentary power failure period R1.25-4, R2-4 RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4 98 to 137N·cm – Wiring change required. RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5 × Wiring change required. 66 to 89N·cm × Tighten within the applicable 98(H) × 55.2(W) × 90(D) mm (9.84 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) Within 1ms – × 250(H) × 55(W) × 121(D) mm 0.8 of entire system. LED indication Applicable wire size terminal Confirm the current consumption (5VDC output: ON) Terminal screw size Applicable crimping Precautions for replacement tightening torque. r 0.33 Within 10ms at 24VDC input By noise simulator of 500Vp-p Noise durability Noise voltage 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage Across external DC terminal batch and ground: 500VAC for 1 minute Across external DC terminals Insulation resistance batch and ground 5MΩ or more by insulation resistance tester. 500VAC across primary and 5VDC 10MΩ or more by insulation resistance tester Fuses are not included in Accessory Spare fuse: 1 None × accessories since they are not replaceable. 4-4 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS (4) Specifications comparisons between A61PEU and Q61P-A1/A2 : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Specification A61PEU Q61P-A1/A2 100-120VAC+10%-15% A1: 100-120VAC+10%-15% (85 to 132VAC) (85 to 132VAC) 200-240VAC+10%-15% A2: 200-240VAC+10%-15% (170 to 264VAC) (170 to 264VAC) 50/60Hz ± 5% 50/60Hz ± 5% 5% or less 5% or less 130VA 105VA 20A within 8ms 20A within 8ms 5VDC 8A 6A × current 24VDC – – – Overcurrent 5VDC 8.8A or more 6.6A or more protection 24VDC – – Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V protection 24VDC Input power supply Input frequency Input voltage distortion Max. input apparent power Inrush current Rated output Efficiency Power indicator – – 65% or more 70% or more M4 × 0.7 × 6 M3.5 screws Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.75 to 2mm2 R1.25-4, R2-4 RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4 Applicable tightening External dimensions Noise durability – – Wiring change required. 66 to 89N·cm × Tighten within the applicable (3.86 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.8 0.31 Within 20ms Within 20ms • By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency • Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV • By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency • Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV Across inputs/LG and outputs/ Across inputs/LG and outputs/ Dielectric withstand FG FG voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m Insulation resistance of entire system. × (9.84 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) power failure period Confirm the current consumption RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5 98(H) × 55.2(W) × 90(D) mm Allowable momentary 200-240VAC. Wiring change required. 250(H) × 55(W) × 121(D) mm Weight (kg) Use the Q61P-A2 at voltages of × 98 to 137N·cm torque r 100-120VAC. (5VDC output: ON) Terminal screw size terminal r Precautions for replacement Use the Q61P-A1 at voltages of LED indication Power LED display Applicable crimping Compatibility (6562 ft.)) (6562 ft.)) Across inputs and outputs (LG Across inputs and outputs (LG and FG separated), across and FG separated), across inputs and LG/FG, across inputs and LG/FG, across outputs and FG/LG 10MΩ or outputs and FG/LG 10MΩ or more by insulation resistance more by insulation resistance tester tester tightening torque. r Fuses are not included in accessories since they are not Spare fuse: 1 Accessory Short chip for applied voltage select terminal: 1 None × replaceable, nor are short chip since it is unnecessary to switch operating voltage. 4-5 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS (5) Specifications comparisons between A62PEU and Q62P : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Specification A62PEU Q62P Compatibility Precautions for replacement 100-120VAC+10%-15% Input power supply (85 to 132VAC) 100-240VAC+10%-15% 200-240VAC+10%-15% (85 to 264VAC) (170 to 264VAC) Input frequency 50/60Hz ± 5% 50/60Hz ± 5% 5% or less 5% or less 110VA 105VA Input voltage distortion Max. input apparent power Inrush current 20A within 8ms 20A within 8ms 5VDC 5A 3A × 24VDC 0.8A 0.6A × Overcurrent 5VDC 5.5A or more 3.3A or more protection 24VDC 1.2A or more 0.66A or more Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V protection 24VDC – – 65% or more 65% or more Rated output current Efficiency Power indicator M4 × 0.7 × 6 M3.5 screws Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 0.75 to 2mm2 RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4 118N·cm Applicable tightening torque External dimensions Wiring change required. RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5 × Wiring change required. 66 to 89N·cm × Tighten within the applicable 98(H) × 55.2(W) × 90(D) mm (9.84 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) (3.86 (H) × 2.33 (W) × 3.54 (D) inch) 0.9 0.39 Within 20ms Within 20ms • By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency • Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV • By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency • Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV Allowable momentary power failure period Noise durability × 250(H) × 55(W) × 121(D) mm Weight (kg) Across inputs/LG and outputs/ Across inputs/LG and outputs/ Dielectric withstand FG FG voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 ft.)) (6562 ft.)) Across inputs and outputs (LG Across inputs and outputs (LG and FG separated), across and FG separated), across inputs and LG/FG, across inputs and LG/FG, across Insulation resistance – (5VDC output: ON) Terminal screw size terminal of entire system. LED indication Power LED display Applicable crimping Confirm the current consumption outputs and FG/LG 10MΩ or outputs and FG/LG 10MΩ or more by insulation resistance more by insulation resistance tester tester tightening torque. – Fuses are not included in accessories since they are not Spare fuse: 1 Accessory Short chip for applied voltage select terminal: 1 None × replaceable, nor are short chip since it is unnecessary to switch operating voltage. 4-6 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS (6) Specifications of A68P Specification A68P 100-120VAC+10%-15% (85 to 132VAC) Input power supply 200-240VAC+10%-15% (170 to 264VAC) 50/60Hz ± 5% Input frequency Input voltage distortion - Max. input apparent 95VA power Inrush current Rated 20A within 8ms +15VDC 1.2A -15VDC 0.7A Overcurren +15VDC 1.64A or more t protection -15VDC 0.94A or more output current Efficiency 65% or more Power indicator Power LED display Contact output Switched on if +15VDC output is +14.25V Power ON monitor output or higher or -15VDC output is -14.25V or lower. Min. contact switching load: 5VDC, 10mA Max. contact switching load: 264VAC, 2A (R load) Terminal screw size M3 × 0.5 × 6 Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 Applicable crimping V1.25-4, V1.25-YS4A, terminal V2-S4, V2-YS4A Applicable tightening 68N·cm torque External dimensions 250(H) × 75.5(W) × 121(D) mm (9.84 (H) × 2.97 (W) × 4.76 (D) inch) Weight (kg) 0.9 Substitute the general-purpose switching power supply, whose specifications are shown below, for the A68P. Choose current capacity with the result of calculating the current consumption of entire system to be used. Specification Voltage Precautions for replacement +15VDC ± 3%(14.55V to 15.45V) -15VDC ± 3%(-14.55 to -15.45V) Ripple voltage 50mVp-p or less Spike voltage 100mVp-p or less Output voltage limit Within ± 1V 4-7 4 POWER SUPPLY MODULE REPLACEMENTS 4.3 Precautions for Power Supply Module Replacement (1) Current consumption differs between the Q series and A series modules. Select the power supply module with the result of calculating the current consumption of entire system. (2) Applicable wire and crimping terminals for terminal blocks differ between the Q Series and the A Series. Use the wire and crimping terminals compatible with the specifications. (3) The Q61P-A does not support both 100 and 200 VAC. Select the Q61-A1 (for 100 VAC) or Q61P-A2 (for 200 VAC) according to operating voltage. (4) The large-capacity type power supply Q64P (8.5A) for the Q Series is also available. It is recommended to use it when larger current capacity is necessary. 4-8 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT 5 5.1 List of Alternative Models for Base Unit and Extension Cable A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Main base unit Extension base unit Extension cable Model Q series alternative models Model Remark (restrictions) A32B Q32SB A35B Q35B A38B Q38B A38B-UL Q38B A32B-E Q32SB A35B-E Q35B A38B-E Q38B A32B-S1 Q33B A38HB Q38B A38HBEU Q38B A52B Q52B A55B Q55B A58B Q55B Q55B × 2 units Number of I/O slots: 8 slots → 5 slots × 2 units A62B Q63B Number of I/O slots: 2 slots → 3 slots A65B Q65B A68B Q68B A68B-UL Q68B AC06B QC06B AC12B QC12B AC30B QC30B AC50B QC50B A1SC05NB QC05B Parallel mounting is not allowed. A1SC07NB QC06B Parallel mounting is not allowed. Cable length: 0.7m → 0.6m A1SC30NB QC30B Parallel mounting is not allowed. A1SC50NB QC50B Parallel mounting is not allowed. Number of I/O slots: 2slots → 3 slots 5-1 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT 5.2 Base Unit and Extension Cable Specifications Comparisons 5.2.1 Base Unit Specifications Comparisons (1) Main base unit (a) Comparisons between A32B(-E) and Q32SB Type Item A/QnA series Q series A32B(-E) Q32SB Loaded I/O modules Possibility of extension Mounting hole size External dimensions Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement 2 can be loaded Cannot connect extension modules. ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 250(H) × 247(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 9.72(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 114(W) × 18.5(D) mm (3.86(H) × 4.49(W) × 0.75(D) inch) 227 × 200 mm (8.94 × 7.87 inch) 101 × 80 mm (3.98 × 3.15 inch) Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. When using the renewal tool (Base adapter) with existing mounting holes, use the Q33B. (b) Comparisons between A32B-S1 and Q33B Type Item Loaded I/O modules A/QnA series Q series A32B-S1 Q33B 2 can be loaded Possibility of extension 3 can be loaded Extendable Mounting hole size ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) External dimensions 250(H) × 268(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 10.55(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 189(W) × 44.1(D) mm (3.86(H) × 7.44(W) × 1.74(D) inch) 248 × 200 mm (9.76 × 7.87 inch) 169 × 80 mm (6.65 × 3.15 inch) Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. The renewal tool (Base adapter) for the A32B-S1 is not available. (c) Comparisons between A35B(-E) and Q35B Type Item A/QnA series Q series A35B(-E) Q35B Loaded I/O modules 5 can be loaded Possibility of extension Extendable Mounting hole size ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) External dimensions 250(H) × 382(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 15.04(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 245(W) × 44.1(D) mm (3.86(H) × 9.65(W) × 1.74(D) inch) 362 × 200 mm (14.25 × 7.87 inch) 224.5 × 80 mm (8.84 × 3.15 inch) Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. The renewal tool (Base adapter) with existing mounting holes is available. (d) Comparisons between A38B(-E/-UL)/A38HB/A38HBEU and Q38B Type Item Loaded I/O modules A/QnA series Q series A38B(-E/-UL)/A38HB/ A38HBEU Q38B 8 can be loaded Possibility of extension 5-2 Extendable Mounting hole size ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) External dimensions 250(H) × 480(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 18.90(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 328(W) × 44.1(D) mm (3.86(H) × 12.91(W) × 1.74(D) inch) 460 × 200 mm (18.11 × 7.87 inch) 308 × 80 mm (12.13 × 3.15 inch) Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. The renewal tool (Base adapter) with existing mounting holes is available. 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT (2) Extension base unit (No power supply module required) (a) Comparisons between A52B and Q52B Type Item A/QnA series Q series A52B Q52B Loaded I/O modules 2 can be loaded Possibility of extension Mounting hole size External dimensions Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Extendable ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 250(H) × 183(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 7.20(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 106(W) × 44.1(D) mm (3.86(H) × 4.17(W) × 1.74(D) inch) 163 × 200 mm (6.42 × 7.87 inch) 83.5 × 80 mm (3.29 × 3.15 inch) Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. The renewal tool (Base adapter) with existing mounting holes is available. (b) Comparisons between A55B and Q55B Type Item A/QnA series Q series A55B Q55B Loaded I/O modules 5 can be loaded Possibility of extension Extendable Mounting hole size ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) External dimensions 250(H) × 297(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 11.69(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 189(W) × 44.1(D) mm (3.86(H) × 7.44(W) × 1.74(D) inch) 277 × 200 mm (10.91 × 7.87 inch) 167 × 80 mm (6.57 × 3.15 inch) Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. The renewal tool (Base adapter) with existing mounting holes is available. (c) Comparisons between A58B and two Q55Bs Type Item Loaded I/O modules A/QnA series Q series A58B Q55B × 2 5 units × 2 can be loaded 8 can be loaded Possibility of extension Extendable Mounting hole size ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) External dimensions 250(H) × 411(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 16.18(W) × 1.14(D) inch) (98(H) × 189(W) × 44.1(D) mm) × 2 ((3.86(H) × 7.44(W) × 1.74(D) inch) × 2) 391 × 200 mm (5.39 × 7.87 inch) (167 × 80 mm) × 2 ((6.57 × 3.15 inch) × 2) Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. When using the renewal tool (base adapter) with existing mounting holes, use the Q68B. (3) Extension base unit (Power supply module loaded) (a) Comparisons between A62B and Q63B Type Item Loaded I/O modules A/QnA series Q series A62B Q63B 2 can be loaded Possibility of extension 3 can be loaded Extendable Mounting hole size ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) External dimensions 250(H) × 283(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 11.14(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 189(W) × 44.1(D) mm (3.86(H) × 7.44(W) × 1.74(D) inch) 218 × 200 mm (8.58 × 7.87 inch) 167 × 80 mm (6.57 × 3.15 inch) Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. The renewal tool (Base adapter) with existing mounting holes is available. 5-3 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT (b) Comparisons between A65B and Q65B Type Item A/QnA series Q series A65B Q65B Loaded I/O modules 5 can be loaded Possibility of extension Mounting hole size External dimensions Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Extendable ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 250(H) × 352(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 13.86(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 245(W) × 44.1(D) mm (3.86(H) × 9.65(W) × 1.74(D) inch) 332 × 200 mm (13.07 × 7.87 inch) 222.5 × 80 mm (8.76 × 3.15 inch) Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. The renewal tool (Base adapter) with existing mounting holes is available. (c) Comparisons between A68B (-UL) and Q68B Type Item A/QnA series Q series A68B(-UL) Q68B Loaded I/O modules 8 can be loaded Possibility of extension Mounting hole size External dimensions Dimensions for mounting to the panel Precautions for replacement Extendable ∅6 mm (0.24 in) dia. pearshaped hole (for M5 screw) M4 screw hole or ∅4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 250(H) × 466(W) × 29(D) mm (9.84(H) × 18.35(W) × 1.14(D) inch) 98(H) × 328(W) × 44.1(D) mm (3.86(H) × 12.91(W) × 1.74(D) inch) 446 × 200 mm (17.56 × 7.87 inch) 306 × 80 mm (12.05 × 3.15 inch) Refer to Section 5.3.1 for replacement precautions. The renewal tool (Base adapter) with existing mounting holes is available. 5.2.2 Extension Cables Specifications Comparisons Type A/QnA Series Item Cable length 5-4 Q series A main–A extension Ans main–A extension 0.45m – A1SC05NB QC05B 0.6m AC06B – QC06B 0.7m – A1SC07NB QC06B 1.2m AC12B – QC12B 3.0m AC30B A1SC30NB QC30B 5.0m AC50B – QC50B 5.0m – A1SC50NB QC50B Precautions for replacement Refer to Section 5.3.2 for replacement precautions. 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT 5.3 Precautions for Base Unit and Extension Cable Replacement 5.3.1 Precautions for Base Unit Replacement (1) When replacing the A/QnA series base unit with the Q series, it is necessary to redo the mounting holes to fix the unit to a control panel, since the two series have different mounting hole size. (2) When using the existing mounting holes to install the Q series base unit, use the renewal tool (Base adapter) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. This base adapter allows to omit the procedure of redoing mounting holes. 5.3.2 Precautions for Extension Cable Replacement The total extension distance of the Q series extension cable is 13.2m while that of the A series is 6.6m. Select a suitable cable according to your system. 5-5 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT 5.4 QA65B Model Extension Base Unit The QA65B enables Q series CPU units to be compatible with A series large-sized modules. (Only the High Performance model QCPU is applicable to the QA65B.) 5.4.1 System Configuration This section explains the system configuration and precautions for use of the QA65B type extension base unit. (1) Connection order of connection base units When using the Q6£B, QA1S6£B, and QA65B together, connect them in the order of the Q6£B, QA1S6£B, and QA65B in the closest position to the main base unit. (2) Connection order of extension base units upon setting the extension stage number To use extension base units, it is necessary to set extension stage numbers (1 to 7) with the stage number setting connector. Set the extension stage number 1 to the connected extension base unit closest to the main base unit, and the following extension stage number (up to 7) to the following extension base units in the connected order. Stage setting connector   QCPU Setting of extension stage Power supply 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Q38B Main base unit Q68B Extension base unit for module installation corresponding to the Q series (Q6
B is connected to the main base unit or Q6
B.) QA1S68B Extension base unit for module installation corresponding to the AnS series (QA1S6
B is connected to the main base unit or Q6
B. or QA1S6
B) QA65B Extension base unit for module installation corresponding to the A series (QA65B is connected to the end of QA1S6
B or QA65B) Power supply 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1   2 Power supply 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23   3 5-6 Power supply 24 25 26 27 28   5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT 5.4.2 List of Configurating Devices The following table shows modules that can be used on the QA65B type extension base units. Name Power supply module Type Remark A61P, A62P, A63P, A65P, A67P, A66P, A68P, A61PEU, A62PEU Input module Output module AX10, AX11, AX11EU, AX20, AX21, AX21EU, AX31, AX31-S1, AX40, AX41, AX41-S1, AX42, AX42-S1, AX50, AX50-S1, AX60, AX60-S1, AX70, AX71, AX80, AX80E, AX81, AX81-S1, AX81-S2, AX81-S3, AX81B, AX82 AY10, AY10A, AY11, AY11E, AY11AEU, AY11EEU, AY13, AY13E, AY13EU, AY15EU, AY20EU, AY11A, AY22, AY23, AY40, AY40P, AY40A, AY41, AY41P, AY42, AY42-S1, AY42-S2, AY42-S3, AY42-S4, AY50, AY51, AY51-S1, AY60, AY60S, AY60E, AY60EP, AY70, AY80EP, AY71, AY72, AY80, AY81, AY81EP, AY82EP I/O module A42XY, AH42, High-speed counter module AD61, AD61S1 A/D converter module A68AD, A68AD-S2, A68ADN, A616AD A62DA, A62DA-S1, A68DAV, A68DAI-S1, A616DAV, A616DAI A616TD, A60MX, AD71, AD71S1, AD778M D/A converter module Temperature-Digital converter A68RD3, A68RD4, module A60MXR, A60MXT Interrupt module Positioning module MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master module AI61, AI61-S1 AD70, AD70D, AD71S7, AD72, AD75P1-S3, AD75P2-S3, AD75P3-S3 *1 AD75M1, AD75M2, AD75M3 *1 AJ71T32-S3 *1 AJ71PT32-S3, AD51-S3, Paging module AD22-S1 Position detection module A61LS, PC fault detection module AS91 module Supersonic linear scale module ID interface module AD59, A62LS-S5, A63LS AD59-S1 AJ71ID2-R4 AD32ID1, AD32ID2 AJ51T64 AJ71B62-S3 AJ71J92-S3 External error check module AD51FD-S3 Voice output module A11VC Vision sensor module AS50VS, Blanking module AG60 Dummy module AG62 *1 *2 *2 A64BTL B/NET interface module master module AD51H-S3 AJ71ID1-R4, MELSEC-I/OLINK module JEMANET(JPCN-1) *3 AD71S2, Intelligent communication module Memory card centronics interface *1 *2 *2 AS50VS-GN The dedicated instructions of QnA/A series program are not applicable to the QCPU. Replace them with the FROM/TO instructions. *2 When using the QA1S65B/QA1S68B, totally up to 6 modules can be connected including the corresponding modules mounted to the QA1S65B/QA1S68B. *3 Only one interrupt module selected from QI60, A1SI61, AI61 and AI61-S1 can be used. 5-7 5 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE REPLACEMENT 5.4.3 External Dimensions The following shows the external dimensions the QA65B. 2×6-M4 screws (for module installation) 4-φ6 installation holes (M5 mounting screw) Hand hold QA65B 200±0.3 (7.87±0.01) 250 (9.84) Base cover 46.6 (1.83) 332±0.3 (13.07±0.01) 10 (0.39) 352 (13.86) Unit: mm (inch) 5-8 6 MEMORY AND BATTERY REPLACEMENT 6 MEMORY AND BATTERY REPLACEMENT 6 6.1 List of Alternative Models for Memory A/QnA series models to be discontinued Product Memory cassette IC-RAM memory EP-ROM memory Model Q series alternative models Model Remark (restrictions) A3NMCA-0 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A3NMCA-2 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A3NMCA-4 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A3NMCA-8 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A3NMCA-16 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A3NMCA-24 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A3NMCA-40 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A3NMCA-56 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A3AMCA-96 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A4UMCA-128 Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A4UMCA-8E Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A4UMCA-32E Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative A4UMCA-128E Unnecessary Built-in RAM and built-in flash ROM are alternative 4KRAM Unnecessary Built-in RAM is alternative 4KEROM Unnecessary Built-in flash ROM is alternative 32KROM Unnecessary Built-in flash ROM is alternative 64KROM Unnecessary Built-in flash ROM is alternative 6-1 6 MEMORY AND BATTERY REPLACEMENT 6.2 Precautions for Memory and Battery Replacement (1) Precaution for memory replacement (a) The Q series does not need memory cassettes, since its CPU module incorporates the built-in RAM/flash ROM. This built-in flash ROM in the CPU module enables the ROM operation (Boot run). (b) When using multiple blocks of extension file registers or sampling trace function for the Q series, the SRAM card for the series is required. (2) Precaution for battery replacement The battery for the A series (A6BAT*) should be replaced with the one for Q series (Q6BAT, Q7BAT). Refer to the users manual of each CPU module for battery life, since it varies depending on the type of CPU module and memory cassette. * The A6BAT is not a model to be discontinued. 6-2 6 MEMORY AND BATTERY REPLACEMENT Memo 6-3 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT This chapter explains how to replace (reuse) the programs and comments of the A and QnA series CPU with the Q series, and precautions for the replacement. (1) Comparisons between ACPU and QCPU : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Item ACPU specification Main Sub 1 Sequence program Sub 2 Sub 3 SFC • Main program is required. • Sub programs, if included, are switched with the CHG instructions. • The SFC is dealt as the microcomputer program of main QCPU specification and precautions Compatfor replacement ibility Refer to [Specification] • Each program is dealt as one file. [Measure] r • Execute the file setting of PLC parameter. Section 7.7.9 [Specification] • Creating microcomputer program is not applicable. [Measure] Microcomputer program • A user-created microcomputer program and the microcomputer program of the utility package are available. • Replacing the ACPU user-created microcomputer program with sequence program since the microcomputer program execution is not applicable. • For utility packages instructions, correct them equivalent to the corresponding instructions of the QCPU. × – [Specification] Instruction • Dedicated instructions for the ACPU (LED instruction, etc.) are available. • With the Change PLC type, instructions are converted automatically except some instructions. [Measure] r Section 7.2 • The inconvertible instructions are converted to SM1255 and SD1255 which correcting the programs is required. [Specification] File register • Storage area is reserved in a memory cassette. • One block is set in 8 k points unit. • Data is stored in a standard RAM or memory card. • One block is set in 32k points unit. [Measure] r Section 7.7.10 • Execute the file setting of PLC parameter. [Specification] Timer, Counter 7-1 • Timer and counter are processed with the END. • Timer and counter are processed when executing an instruction. [Measure] • Review the programs since the processing timing differs between timer and counter. Section r 7.7.4, 7.7.5 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Item ACPU specification QCPU specification and precautions Compatfor replacement ibility Refer to [Specification] Parameter • Parameters are dedicated for each CPU. • Parameters are dedicated for each CPU. [Measure] r • Check and re-set the parameters since specifications and functions differ between the two CPUs. Section 7.3 [Specification] Special relay • 256 points of M9000 to M9255 are provided. • 1800 points of SM0 to SM1799 are provided. [Measure] • Although automatic conversion is executed for the QCPU replacement, review the points since some specifications differ between the two CPUs. r Section 7.4 [Specification] Special register • 256 points of D9000 to D9255 are provided. • 1800 points of SD0 to SD1799 are provided. [Measure] • Although automatic conversion is executed for the QCPU replacement, review the points since some specifications differ between the two CPUs. r Section 7.5 [Specification] Comment • Comments are managed as a common comment or program original comment. • The comment capacity of ACPU is up to 127k (64k + 63k) bytes. • Comments are managed as a common comment or program original comment. • Comments are automatically replaced upon the QCPU conversion. • The comment capacity of the QCPU depends on memory capacity. – [Specification] Writing programs to ROM • The ROM operation is executed with the EP-ROM. • The boot run is executed with programs stored in a standard ROM or memory card upon the QCPU replacement. [Measure] r Section 7.7.11 • Execute the boot setting of PLC parameter. 7-2 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT (2) Comparison between QnACPU and QCPU Item Sequence program SFC program QnACPU specification • Each program is dealt as one file. QCPU specification and precautions Compatfor replacement ibility Refer to [Specification] – • Each program is dealt as one file. [Specification] Instruction • Dedicated instructions as display (LED) instruction, status latch (SLT) instruction, etc. are available. • With the Change PLC type, instructions are converted automatically except some instructions. [Measure] r Section 7.2 • The inconvertible instructions are converted to SM1255 and SD1255 which correcting the programs is required. [Specification] File register • Data is stored in a memory card. • One block is set in 32k points unit. • Data is stored in a standard RAM or memory card. • One block is set in 32k points unit. [Measure] r Section 7.7.10 • Review the setting since the number of memory cards differs between the two CPUs. [Specification] Parameter • Dedicated parameters for each CPU are provided. • Dedicated parameters for each CPU are provided. [Measure] r • Check and re-set the parameters since specifications and functions differ between the two CPUs. Section 7.3 [Specification] Special relay • 1800 points of SM0 to SM1799 are provided. • 1800 points of SM0 to SM1799 are provided. [Measure] r • Review the points since some specifications differ between the two CPUs. Section 7.4 [Specification] Special register Comment • 1800 points of SD0 to SD1799 are provided. • Comments are managed as a common comment or program original comment. • 1800 points of SD0 to SD1799 are provided. [Measure] r • Review the points since some specifications differ between the two CPUs. Section 7.5 [Specification] • Comments are managed as a common comment or program original comment. – [Specification] Writing programs to ROM • The boot run is executed with program and parameter stored in a memory card. • Up to two memory cards can be installed. • The boot run is executed with the programs stored in a standard ROM or memory card upon QCPU replacement. • One memory card can be installed. [Measure] • Execute the boot setting of PLC parameter. 7-3 r Section 7.7.11 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.1 Program Replacement Procedure The programs and comments of the A and QnA series CPU can be replaced with the Q series by "Change PLC type" of the GX Developer. 7.1.1 Program Conversion Procedure from ACPU to QCPU Program conversion procedure follows the order of (1) → (2) → (3) below. (1) Reading process of conversion source data. (2) Program conversion from ACPU to QCPU with the Change PLC type operation. (3) Writing process of converted data. Refer to Section 7.1.2 for details of the change operation. (1) Reading ACPU program (a) PLC read from ACPU (b) Reading project data of ACPU (Refer to (1)-(a) and (1)-(b) in the following diagram.) (2) Change PLC type (3) Writing QCPU program (a) PLC write to QCPU (b) Storing project data of QCPU (Refer to (3)-(a) and (3)-(b) in the following diagram.) (1)-(a) (3)-(a) ACPU QCPU GX Developer Storage device (1)-(b) (3)-(b) ACPU Project data QCPU Project data Personal computer 7-4 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.1.2 Change PLC Type Operation The Change PLC type is a function that changes the target PLC type of the data read to the GX Developer. The instructions that are not automatically converted are changed to the OUT SM1255 (for High Performance model QCPU)/OUT SM999 (Basic model for QCPU). Search these instructions or the SM1255/SM999 devices in the converted programs to convert them manually. For intelligent function modules and network modules, review programs and parameters. (1) Applicable range of conversion from ACPU by the GX Developer The following table shows the applicable range of conversion from the ACPU to other PLCs. As it shows, converting to all PLC CPUs is applicable. Product GX Developer Change source PLC ACPU ACPU (2) Operation of GX Developer (a) Select the "Change PLC type" of the "Project" menu. 7-5 Change destination PLC QnACPU QCPU 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT (b) Specify the target PLC type in the "Change PLC type" dialog. PLC series setting Click the [OK] button after setting the PLC type. PLC type setting (c) Select the conversion method of special relays/registers. Specify the conversion destination of special relays/registers (ACPU:M9000s/D9000s). Check the [Convert M9000/D9000←→Q/QnACPU special devices] • Checked: Converted to the Q dedicated device. • Not Checked: Converted to the A compatible (SM1000s/SD1000s). Fixed to "Checked" when selecting the Basic model QCPU. It is recommended to check the box when specifying the device conversion destination. Click the [Yes] or [Confirm change] button after specifying the device conversion destination to start the Change PLC type . • [Yes] : The change is executed without intermediate steps of user confirmation. • [Confirm change] : Asks the user for confirming the changes. 7-6 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.1.3 ACPU Program Conversion Ratio • Conversion ratio of common instructions (Sequence/basic/application instructions) The following table shows the conversion ratio when changing the PLC type of the ACPU common instructions to the QCPU. More than 90% of the common instructions are automatically converted. High Performance model QCPU Number of Instruction type Number of instructions instructions applicable for automatic conversion Sequence instructions instructions instructions conversion 6 0 100% 5 5 0 100% Output instructions 6 5 1 83% Shift instructions 2 2 0 100% Master control instructions 2 2 0 100% Termination instructions 2 2 0 100% Other instructions 3 3 0 100% 26 25 1 96% Comparison operation instructions 36 36 0 100% Arithmetic operation instructions 40 40 0 100% 8 8 0 100% 16 16 0 100% Program branch instructions 9 9 0 100% Program switching instructions 1 0 1 0% Link refresh instructions 2 2 0 100% BCD ↔ BIN conversion instructions Data transfer instructions 112 111 1 99% Logical operation instructions 18 18 0 100% Rotation instructions 16 16 0 100% Shift instructions 12 12 0 100% Data processing instructions 20 19 1 95% FIFO instructions 4 4 0 100% Buffer memory access instructions 8 8 0 100% FOR to NEXT instructions 2 2 0 100% 4 0 4 0% Access instructions Display instructions Other instructions Total number of application instructions Total number of sequence/basic/application 7-7 ratio 6 Local station, remote I/O station instructions manual Conversion Connection instructions Total number of basic instructions Application requiring Contact instructions Total number of sequence instructions Basic Number of instructions 5 3 2 60% 10 2 8 20% 99 84 15 85% 237 220 17 93% 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT • Conversion ratio of dedicated instructions The following table shows the conversion ratio when changing the PLC type of the ACPU dedicated instructions to the QCPU. High Performance model QCPU Number of Instruction type Number of instructions instructions applicable for automatic conversion instructions (Functional extension) ratio conversion 3 0 6 2 4 33% Data operation instructions 6 6 0 100% I/O operation instructions 2 2 0 100% 27 27 0 100% 25 24 1 96% Data control instructions 6 6 0 100% Clock instructions 2 2 0 100% 7 0 7 0% Program switching instructions 4 0 4 0% Instructions for PID control 3 2 1 67% 91 74 17 81% 9 5 4 56% 59 0 59 0% 68 5 63 7% 159 79 80 50% instructions Character string processing instructions Subtotal (For modules) manual 3 instructions instructions Conversion Structured program instructions Extension file register Dedicated requiring Direct input/output instructions Real number processing Dedicated Number of instructions Instructions for data link Instructions for special function modules Subtotal Total number of dedicated instructions 100% Remarks The automatic conversion is applied to the instructions of which equivalent functions and instructions exist in the change destination PLCs. Some instructions are not converted for the following causes. Refer to Section 7.2 Instruction Conversion to change the program manually. (1) The change target PLC does not have the equivalent functions and instructions. (2) Instructions to specified modules cause to change the module and buffer memory configuration. (3) Multiple instructions with the same name and argument exist. (Example) CHK instruction, etc. (4) The conversion causes a mismatch in the instructions. (Example) IX instruction, etc. 7-8 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.1.4 Reading (Reusing) Other Format Files The following explains how to read (appropriate) files in the GPPQ/GPPA format other than that of the GX Developer. Follow this procedure to convert them to the file format of the GX Developer. (1) Operation Procedure Select [Project]  [Import file] ［Import from GPPQ format file］ ［Import from GPPA format file］ (2) Setting screen (h) (a) (e) (g) (f) (c) (d) (b) (a) Drive/Path, System name, Machine name Designates the location of data created in GPPQ or GPPA format. Enter the system name and machine name of the data specified in the Drive/Path. Clicking the [Browse] button shows the dialog box for choosing the system name and machine name. Double-click the file to be read to specify. (b) Source data list Displays data created in GPPQ or GPPA format. Check the checkbox of data names to be selected. For the selected comments, the range of device comment, which can be read with the Common tab or Local tab, are settable. (c) [Param+prog] button/[Select all] button • [Param+prog] button Selects only the parameter data and program data of the source data. • [Select all] button Selects all data in a source data list. Comment2 is selected for the A series, and the device memories of the number of data are displayed. The first data name is selected for comments and file registers in the QnA series. (d) [Cancel all selections] button Cancels all the selected data. 7-9 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT (e) <> tab screen (A series) Set this when specifying the range for common comments and read data. (f) <> tab screen (A series) Set this when specifying the range for comments by program and read data. (g) Merge peripheral statement/note (h) [Execute] button Click this button after making the setting. (3) Setting Procedure (a) Data selection 1) Set a drive/path for reading in GPPQ or GPPA format. 2) Click the [Browse] button to set the system name and machine name of the project to be read. 3) Check the checkbox of data to be selected by with the [Param+prog] button, [Select all] button, or the mouse. 4) Click the [Execute] button after making necessary settings. (b) Canceling data selection 1) When canceling the selected data arbitrarily: Clear the checkmark (P) in the checkbox with the mouse or space key. 2) When canceling all the selected data: Click the [Cancel all selection] button. 7 - 10 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT (4) Precautions for reading the other format files A6GPP, SW0S-GPPA format data For data selection GPPA format file reading Ladder return positions For data selection 7 - 11 For A series Read data with GX Developer after performing the corresponding format conversion with GPPA. For the operating methods, refer to the Type SW4IVD-GPPA(GPP) Operating Manual. For device comment selection, you may only choose either comment 2 or comment 1. Deletes the project data on GX Developer and read the other format file. The area in excess of the program capacity is deleted when read. For the PLC type which cannot use subprograms, subprograms are deleted when read. When the file includes microcomputer programs editted with other than the SFC program (e.g. SW0SRX-FNUP), they are lost. For QnA series Returning places are different between GPPQ and GX Developer. Because of this, if the total of return sources and return destinations exceeds 24 lines in a single ladder block, the program is not displayed properly. Corrective action: Add SM400 (normally ON contact) to adjust the return positions. For the device memory and file register, you may select only one data name for each item. 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.2 Instruction Conversion GX Developer enables instruction conversion using the Change PLC type. The following explains how to process both applicable instructions and not applicable instructions for the conversion. 7.2.1 List of Instructions Conversion from A to QCPU (Sequence/Basic/Application Instructions) : Automatic conversion ×: Manual conversion required Contents BIN 16-bit addition, subtraction BIN 16-bit multiplication, division Ladder block series connection Series connection 16-bit data comparison 32-bit data comparison Series connection Conversion from hexadecimal BIN to ASCII BCD 4-digit addition, subtraction BCD 4-digit multiplication, division Conversion from BIN data to 4-digit BCD Conversion from 4-digit BCD to BIN data Block 16-bit data transfer Bit reset for word devices Bit set for word devices 1-bit shift to left of n-bit data 1-bit shift to right of n-bit data ACPU High Performance model Reference section QCPU Instruction name Instruction name Conversion + + +P +P -P -P * * *P *P / / /P /P ANB ANB AND AND AND< AND< AND<= AND<= AND<> AND<> AND= AND= AND> AND> AND>= AND>= ANDD< ANDD< ANDD<= ANDD<= ANDD<> ANDD<> ANDD= ANDD= ANDD> ANDD> ANDD>= ANDD>= ANI ANI ASC OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) B+ B+ B+P B+P BBB-P B-P B* B* B*P B*P B/ B/ B/P B/P BCD BCD BCDP BCDP BIN BIN BINP BINP BMOV BMOV BMOVP BMOVP BRST BRST BRSTP BRSTP BSET BSET BSETP BSETP BSFL BSFL BSFLP BSFLP BSFR BSFR BSFRP BSFRP 7 - 12 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Automatic conversion ×: Manual conversion required ACPU Contents High Performance model Reference section QCPU Instruction name Instruction name Conversion Sub-routine program calls CALL CALLP CALLP Special format failure checks CHK OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) Bit device output reverse CHK OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (1) Main ↔ subprogram switching CHG OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (2) Pointer branch instructions CJ CJ r 7.7.7 Carry flag reset CLC OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) 16-bit data negation transfer Link Refresh Instructions BIN 32-bit addition, subtraction BIN 32-bit multiplication, division Logical products of 32-bit data BCD 8-digit addition, subtraction BCD 8-digit multiplication, division Conversion from BIN data to 8-digit BCD Conversion from 8-digit BCD to BIN data 32-bit data negation transfer 32-bit BIN data decrement CML CML CMLP CMLP COM COM D+ D+ D+P D+P D- D- D-P D-P D* D* D*P D*P D/ D/ D/P D/P DAND DAND DANDP DANDP DB+ DB+ DB+P DB+P DB- DB- DB-P DB-P DB* DB* DB*P DB*P DB/ DB/ DB/P DB/P DBCD DBCD DBCDP DBCDP DBIN DBIN DBINP DBINP DCML DCML DCMLP DCMLP DDEC DDEC DDECP DDECP DEC DEC DECP DECP 8 → 256-bit decode DECO DECO DECOP DECOP 2-word data read from the intelligent/special DFRO DFRO function module DFROP DFROP Interrupt disable instructions DI DI Refresh disable DI DI DINC DINC DINCP DINCP DIS DIS DISP DISP DMOV DMOV 16-bit BIN data decrement 32-bit BIN data increment 4-bit groupings of 16-bit data 32-bit data transfer Logical sums of 32-bit data Left rotation of 32-bit data Right rotation of 32-bit data 7 - 13 CALL DMOVP DMOVP DOR DOR DORP DORP DRCL DRCL DRCLP DRCLP 7.7.7 7.7.7 DRCR DRCR 7.7.7 DRCRP DRCRP 7.7.7 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Automatic conversion ×: Manual conversion required ACPU Contents High Performance model Reference section QCPU Instruction name Instruction name Conversion Left rotation of 32-bit data Right rotation of 32-bit data 1-word shift to left of n-word data 1-word shift to right of n-word data 32 bit data checks 2-word data write to the intelligent/special function DROL DROL 7.7.7 DROLP DROLP 7.7.7 DROR DROR 7.7.7 DRORP DRORP 7.7.7 DSFL DSFL DSFLP DSFLP DSFR DSFR DSFRP DSFRP DSUM DSUM 7.7.7 DSUMP DSUMP 7.7.7 DTO DTO module DTOP DTOP Timing pulse generation DUTY DUTY DXCH DXCH 32-bit data conversion 32-bit data non-exclusive logical sum operations DXCHP DXCHP DXNR DXNR DXNRP DXNRP DXOR DXOR DXORP DXORP Interrupt enable instruction EI EI Link refresh enable EI EI 256 → 8-bit encode ENCO ENCO ENCOP ENCOP Sequence program termination END END 32-bit exclusive logical sum operations Main routine program termination Reading oldest data from tables Writing data to the data table Identical 16-bit data block transfers FEND FEND FIFR FIFR FIFRP FIFRP FIFW FIFW FIFWP FIFWP FMOV FMOV FMOVP FMOVP FOR to NEXT Instructions FOR FOR 1-word data read from the intelligent/ FROM FROM *1 special function module FROMP FROMP *1 INC INC 16-bit BIN data increment INCP INCP Return from interrupt programs IRET IRET Pointer branch instructions JMP JMP Operation start LD LD LD< LD< LD<= LD<= BIN 16-bit data comparison BIN 32-bit data comparison LD<> LD<> LD= LD= LD> LD> LD>= LD>= LDD< LDD< LDD<= LDD<= LDD<> LDD<> LDD= LDD= LDD> LDD> LDD>= LDD>= Operation start LDI LDI ASCII code display instructions LED OUT SM1255 *1 × 7.2.3 (3) Note that the buffer memory address between Q series and A series may differ. 7 - 14 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Automatic conversion ×: Manual conversion required ACPU Contents High Performance model Reference section QCPU Instruction name Instruction name Conversion LEDA OUT SM1255 × LEDB OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) LEDC OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) Annunciator reset instruction LEDR LEDR Local station data read LRDP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) Local station data write LWTP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) MC MC Character display instructions Comment display instructions Master control set, reset 16-bit data transfer MCR MCR MOV MOV MOVP MOVP Operation result pop MPP MPP Operation result push MPS MPS Operation result read BIN 16-bit data 2's complement FOR to NEXT Instructions No operation (NOP, NOPLF) Parallel connection BIN 16-bit data comparison Ladder block parallel connection BIN 32-bit data comparison Parallel connection MRD MRD NEG NEG NEGP NEGP NEXT NEXT NOP NOP NOPLF NOPLF OR OR OR< OR< OR<= OR<= OR<> OR<> OR= OR= OR> OR> OR>= OR>= ORB ORB ORD< ORD< ORD<= ORD<= ORD<> ORD<> ORD= ORD= ORD> ORD> ORD>= ORD>= ORI ORI OUT instruction OUT (*1) OUT (*1) Trailing edge output PLF PLF Leading edge output PLS PLS Print ASCII code instruction PR PR Print comment instruction PRC PRC RCL RCL RCLP RCLP 7.7.7 RCR RCR 7.7.7 RCRP RCRP 7.7.7 RET RET Left rotation of 16-bit data Right rotation of 16-bit data Return from subroutine program 7.7.7 Remote I/O station data read RFRP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) Read from automatic updating buffer memory RIFR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (12) RIRCV OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (12) RIRD OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (12) RISEND OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (12) Write to automatic updating buffer memory RITO OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (12) Write to intelligent device station buffer memory RIWT OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (12) Network parameter setting RLPA OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (12) Automatic refresh parameter setting RRPA OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (12) Read from intelligent device station buffer memory (with handshake) Read from intelligent device station buffer memory Write to intelligent device station buffer memory (with handshake) *1 The high-speed timer or retentive timer can also be converted according to the parameter setting. 7 - 15 7.2.3 (3) 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Automatic conversion ×: Manual conversion required ACPU Contents High Performance model Reference section QCPU Instruction name Instruction name Conversion ROL ROL 7.7.7 ROLP ROLP 7.7.7 ROR ROR 7.7.7 RORP RORP 7.7.7 Bit device reset RST RST Remote I/O station data write RTOP OUT SM1255 Pointer branch instructions SCJ SCJ Left rotation of 16-bit data Right rotation of 16-bit data × 7.2.3 (3) 7 segment decode SEG SEG Partial refresh SEG SEG SER SER 7.7.7 SERP SERP 7.7.7 SET SET SFL SFL 16-bit data search Bit device set 16-bit data n-bit left shift 16-bit data n-bit right shift Bit device shift SFLP SFLP SFR SFR SFRP SFRP SFT SFT × 7.7.7 SFTP SFTP SLT OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) SLTR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) Carry flag set STC OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) Sequence program stop STOP STOP Setting and resetting status latch Setting and resetting sampling trace 16-bit data checks STRA OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) STRAR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (3) SUM SUM SUMP SUMP SUB OUT SM1255 × SUBP OUT SM1255 × 1-word data write to the intelligent/ TO TO *1 special function module TOP TOP *1 UNI UNI Microcomputer program 4-bit linking of 16-bit data Logical products with 16-bit data WDT reset Logical sums of 16-bit data 16-bit data non-exclusive logical sum operations 16-bit exclusive logical sum operations 16-bit data conversion *1 UNIP UNIP WAND WAND WANDP WANDP WDT WDT WDTP WDTP WOR WOR WORP WORP WXNR WXNR WXNRP WXNRP WXOR WXOR WXORP WXORP XCH XCH XCHP XCHP Note that the buffer memory address between Q series and A series may differ. 7 - 16 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.2.2 List of Instruction Conversion from A to QCPU (Dedicated Instructions) : Automatic conversion ×: Manual conversion required ACPU Contents High Performance model Reference section QCPU Instruction name Instruction name Conversion COS-1 operation on floating point data ACOS ACOS Floating point data addition ADD E+ Conversion from hexadecimal BIN to ASCII ASC ASC SIN-1 operation on floating point data ASIN ASIN TAN-1 operation on floating point data ATAN ATAN BCD type COS-1 operation BACOS BACOS BIN 16-bit dead band controls BAND BAND BCD type SIN-1 operations BASIN BASIN BCD type TAN-1 operations BATAN BATAN Conversion from 4-digit BCD to decimal ASCII BCDDA BCDDA BCD type COS operations BCOS BCOS BCD 8-digit square roots BDSQR BDSQR Conversion from BIN 16-bit to decimal ASCII BINDA BINDA Conversion from BIN 16-bit to hexadecimal ASCII BINHA BINHA Block move between extension file registers BMOVR OUT SM1255 Forced end of FOR to NEXT instruction loop BREAK BREAK BCD type SIN operations BSIN BSIN BCD 4-digit square roots BSQR BSQR 7.2.3 (4) BCD type TAN operations BTAN BTAN Data linking in byte units BTOW BTOW Block exchange between extension file registers BXCHR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) CC1 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) CC2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) CCDSP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) CCDSPV OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) CHK OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) Consecutive display of the same character Changing the character color Special format failure checks Changing check format of CHK instruction CHKEND OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) Displaying numerals CIN0 to CIN9 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Displaying letters of the alphabet CINA to CINZ OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Clearing display of designated area CINCLR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Displaying "-" (hyphen) CINHP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Displaying "-" (minus) CINMP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Displaying "." (period, decimal point) CINPT OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Displaying spaces CINSP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Clearing the display area CLS OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Clearing the VRAM area CLV OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Setting the display mode CMODE OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Transferring canvas data to the VRAM area CMOV OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Setting normal display for characters CNOR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Displaying the cursor COFF OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Designating the character display color COLOR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Reading device comment data COMRD COMRD CON1 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) CON2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) COS operations on floating decimal point data COS COS Displaying a canvas screen CPS1 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Changing the VRAM display address CPS2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) CR1 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) CR2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Switching between normal and highlighted CRDSP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) display for characters CRDSPV OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Setting highlighted display for characters CREV OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Displaying the cursor Consecutive display of the same character 7 - 17 × 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Automatic conversion ×: Manual conversion required Contents Scrolling the screen Conversion from decimal ASCII to BCD 4-digit data Conversion from decimal ASCII to BIN 16-bit data Reading clock data Writing in clock data BIN 32-bit dead band controls Conversion from BCD 8-digit to decimal ASCII data Conversion from BIN 32-bit to decimal ASCII data Conversion from BIN 32-bit data to hexadecimal ASCII data Conversion from decimal ASCII to BCD 8-digit data Conversion from decimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data Conversion from floating point radian to angle Conversion from BIN 32-bit to floating point data Conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data Conversion from floating point to BIN 32-bit data Dissociation of random data Division of floating decimal point data Upper and lower limit controls for BIN 32-bit data Direct output Direct Reset 32-bit data searches Direct Set Conversion from BIN 32-bit to character string Bit tests Conversion from character string to BIN 32-bit data Zone control for BIN 32-bit data Displaying characters Writing characters to the VRAM Exponent operations on floating decimal point data Sub-routine program output OFF calls Bit device output reverse Conversion from BIN 16 data to floating decimal point Reading VRAM data Conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 16-bit Conversion from ASCII to hexadecimal BIN ASCII code conversion of designated character strings Receiving data Conversion from floating decimal point data to BIN 16 Index qualification of a circuit block Entering data from number keys Detecting character-string length Upper and lower limit controls for BIN 16-bit data Setting the cursor position Natural logarithm operations on floating decimal point data Reading word devices in local station Writing data to word devices in local station Communication with remote terminal modules Error resetting with remote terminal modules Multiplication of floating decimal point data Monitoring PID Control Status ACPU High Performance model Reference section QCPU Instruction name Instruction name Conversion CSCRD OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) CSCRU OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) DABCD DABCD DABIN DABIN DATERD DATERD DATEWR DATEWR DBAND DBAND DBCDDA DBCDDA DBINDA DBINDA DBINHA DBINHA DDABCD DDABIN DEG DFLOAT DHABIN DINT DIS DIV DLIMIT DOUT DRST DSER DSET DSTR DTEST DVAL DZONE EPR EPRN EPRV EPRNV EXP FCALL FF FLOAT GET HABIN HEX DDABCD DDABIN DEG DFLT DHABIN DINT NDIS E/ DLIMIT OUT RST DSER SET DSTR DTEST DVAL DZONE OUT SM1255 OUT SM1255 OUT SM1255 OUT SM1255 EXP FCALL FF FLT OUT SM1255 HABIN HEX INPUT × × × × 7.2.3 (11) 7.2.3 (11) 7.2.3 (11) 7.2.3 (11) × 7.2.3 (8), (10), (11) OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (7), (9), (11) INPUT2 INPUT4 INT IX IXEND KEY LEN LIMIT LOCATE OUT SM1255 OUT SM1255 INT OUT SM1255 OUT SM1255 KEY LEN LIMIT OUT SM1255 × × 7.2.3 (9) 7.2.3 (9) × × 7.2.3 (4) 7.2.3 (4) × 7.2.3 (11) LOG LOG LRDP LWTP MINI MINIERR MUL PID57 OUT SM1255 OUT SM1255 OUT SM1255 OUT SM1255 E* OUT SM1255 × × × × 7.2.3 (4) 7.2.3 (4) 7.2.3 (10) 7.2.3 (10) × 7.2.3 (4) 7 - 18 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Automatic conversion ×: Manual conversion required ACPU Contents High Performance model Reference section QCPU Instruction name Instruction name Conversion PID control PIDCONT PIDCONT PID control data setting PIDINIT PIDINIT Displaying ASCII characters PR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (7), (8), (10), (11) PR2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (9) 7.2.3 (9) Sending data up to 00H code Displaying ASCII characters Sending designated number of bytes of data Writing ASCII characters to the VRAM Writing VRAM data Reading present value Setting preset data Conversion from floating decimal point angle to radian OUT SM1255 × OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (7), (8), (10), (11) PRN2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (9) PRN4 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (9) PRV OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) PRNV OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) PUT OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (8), (9), (11) PVRD1 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (6) PVRD2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (6) PVWR1 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (6) PVWR2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (6) RAD RAD 7.2.3 (4) Remote I/O station data read RFRP OUT SM1255 × Changing the extension file register block number RSET OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) Remote I/O station data write RTOP OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) × 7.2.3 (4) Block addition and subtraction SADD $+ Comparison between character strings SCMP OUT SM1255 SIN operation on floating decimal point data SIN SIN Character string transfers SMOV $MOV Reading communication status SPBUSY OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (7), (9), (10) Forced stop of communication processing SPCLR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (7), (9), (10) SQR SQR Reading the display status STAT OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (11) Conversion from BIN 16-bit to character string STR STR Subtraction of floating decimal point data SUB E- SVWR1 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (6) SVWR2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (6) Upper and lower byte exchanges SWAP SWAP TAN operation on floating decimal point data TAN TAN Bit test TEST TEST Linking of random data UNI NUNI VAL VAL WTOB WTOB ZCHG0 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) ZCHG1 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) ZCHG2 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) ZCHG3 OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) Link refresh of designated network ZCOM S.ZCOM Reading/writing data from/to special function ZNFR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (5) module in MELSECNET/10 remote I/O station ZNTO OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (5) Reading from/writing to word devices in the ZNRD J.ZNRD 7.2.3 (5) MELSECNET/10 station ZNWR J.ZNWR 7.2.3 (5) Zone control for BIN 16-bit data ZONE ZONE Direct read/write of extension file registers in 1- ZRRD OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) word units ZRWR OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) Direct read/write of extension file registers in units ZRRDB OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) of bytes ZRWRB OUT SM1255 × 7.2.3 (4) Square root operations for floating decimal point data Setting comparison reference data Conversion from character string to BIN 16-bit data Data dissociation in byte units Program switching 7 - 19 PR4 PRN 7.2.3 (5) 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.2.3 Instructions that May Need a Replacement at Instruction Conversion from ACPU to QCPU Some instructions are not automatically converted upon the replacement of the ACPU with QCPU. The following table shows the instructions that are not automatically converted. Reviewing the program is recommended. Item Instruction type No. ACPU Corrective action instruction (Counter Measure) (1) Sequence instructions Output Instructions CHK Review the program and convert manually. (Supplement) Conversion candidate instruction: [FF] instruction (2) Basic Program switching instructions instructions CHG (Counter Measure) Review the program with referring to Section 7.7.9. (Counter Measure) Data Processing Instructions ASC Review the program and convert manually. (Supplement) Conversion candidate instruction: [$MOV] instruction MELSECNET (II), /B Local, Remote I/O Station Access Instructions LRDP LWTP (Counter Measure) RFRP Reprogram for the network modules to use with a QCPU. RTOP LED Display Instructions (except LEDA dedicated instructions ) LEDB LEDC (Counter Measure) Setting an external display is recommended since the QCPU does not have the LED display function. (Counter Measure) Special format failure (3) Application checks instructions CHK instructions Review the program and convert manually. (Supplement) Conversion candidate instruction: [CHKST], [CHK] instruction Status latch instructions SLT (Counter Measure) SLTR There is no alternative action. STRA (Counter Measure) Review the program and convert manually. Sampling trace instructions (Supplement) STRAR Conversion candidate instructions: [STRA] → [TRACE] instruction [STRAR] → [TRACER] instruction STC (Counter Measure) Review the program and convert manually. Carry flag instructions (Supplement) CLC Conversion candidate instructions: [STC] → [SET SM700] instruction [CLC] → [RST SM700] instruction 7 - 20 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT Item Instruction type No. ACPU Corrective action instruction CHK (Counter Measure) Convert manually with the special format failure check instruction [CHK] of the application instructions. CHKEND Conversion candidate instructions: [CHK] → [CHKCIR] instruction Structured programs instructions (Supplement) [CHKEND] → [CHKEND] instruction IX (Counter Measure) Review the program and convert manually. (Supplement) IXEND Conversion candidate instruction: [IX] → [IX] instruction [IXEND] → [IXEND] instruction (4) Dedicated MELSEC (II), /B instructions Local, Remote I/O Station Access Instructions LRDP LWTP (Counter Measure) RFRP Reprogram the network modules to use with the QCPU. RTOP (Counter Measure) Character string data comparisons instructions Review the program and convert manually. SCMP (Supplement) Conversion candidate instructions: [LD$=], [AND$=], [OR$=] instruction BMOVR Extension file register instructions BXCHR (Counter Measure) RSET Review the program and convert manually. ZRRD (Supplement) ZRRDB Conversion candidate instructions: [BMOV], [MOV], [RSET] ZRWR instruction ZRWRB ZCHG0 (4) Dedicated Proguram switching ZCHG1 (Counter Measure) instructions ZCHG2 Review the program with referring to Section 7.7.9. instructions ZCHG3 PID control instructions PID57 (Counter Measure) There is no alternative action. (Counter Measure) Review the program and convert manually. ZCOM Network (5) dedicated instructions Conversion candidate instructions: [S (P). ZCOM Jn] or [S (P). Network instructions ZCOM Un] instruction ZNRD ZNWR (Counter Measure) ZNFR Reprogram the network modules to use with the QCPU. ZNTO 7 - 21 (Supplement) 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT Item Instruction type No. ACPU Corrective action instruction PVWR1 Control Instructions for high (6) speed counter module type AD61-S1 PVWR2 SVWR1 SVWR2 PVRD1 PVRD2 Control Instructions for computer link module type (7) AJ71C24 (S3,S6,S8)/ AJ71UC24 Control Instructions for (8) memory card interface Special module type AD59 INPUT SPBUSY SPCLR PRN PR GET PUT PRN2 modules PRN4 instructions PR2 terminal interface moduleType AJ71C21 (S1) Reprogram for the network modules to use with the QCPU. PR function Control Instructions for (9) PRN (Counter Measure) PR4 INPUT2 INPUT4 GET PUT SPBUSY (Counter Measure) Reprogram for the network modules to use with the QCPU. Restructuring the system is required depending on the module to be used. SPCLR INPUT Control Instructions for (10) MELSECNET/MINI-S3 Master Module Type AJ71PT32-S3 PRN PR MINI MINIERR SPBUSY SPCLR 7 - 22 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT Item Instruction type No. ACPU Corrective action instruction name CMODE CPS1 CPS2 CMOV CLS CLV CSCRV CSCRD CON1 CON2 COFF LOCATE CNOR CREV CRDSP CRDSPV COLOR CCDSP (11) Special Control instructions for CCDSPV (Counter Measure) function AD57 (S1)CRT controller PRN Reprogram for the network modules to use with the QCPU. modules module/AD58 LCD PR Restructuring the system is required depending on the module to instructions controller module PRNV be used. PRV EPRN EPR EPRNV EPRV CR1 CR2 CC1 CC2 CINMT CIN ( :0 to 9,A to Z) CINSP CINCLR INPUT GET PUT STAT RIFR RIRCV (12) Special RIRD (Counter Measure) function RISEND Convert manually to the same instructions of the Q series. modules instructions 7 - 23 CC-Link instructions RITO RIWT RLPA (Counter Measure) RRPA Set parameters with the GX Developer. 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.2.4 Instruction Conversion from QnACPU to QCPU The automatic conversion is applied to the instructions of which equivalent functions and instructions exist in the change target PLC. For instructions that are not automatically converted, consider reviewing the program referring to the unconvertible instructions described in Section 7.2.5 Re-program for the modules to use with the QCPU, since the specifications of the special function module instructions differ between QCPU compatible modules and QnACPU compatible modules. 7.2.5 Instructions that May Need a Replacement After Conversion from QnACPU to QCPU Some instructions are not automatically converted upon the replacement of the QnACPU with the QCPU. The following table shows the instructions that are not automatically converted and their measures. Reviewing the program is recommended. Instruction type QnACPU LED Display instructions Status latch instructions Corrective action instruction LEDC (Counter Measure) Setting an external display is recommended since the QCPU does not have the LED display function. SLT (Counter Measure) SLTR There is no alternative action. STRA (Counter Measure) Review the program and convert manually. Sampling trace instructions Application (Supplement) STRAR Conversion candidate instructions: [STRA] → [TRACE] instruction instructions [STRAR] → [TRACER] instruction PTRA Program trace instructions PTRAR PTRAEXE (Counter Measure) There is no alternative action. (Counter Measure) Review the program and convert manually. (Use the ATA card as a Other instructions EROMWR memory card.) (Supplement) Conversion candidate instruction: [EROMWR] → [FWRITE] instruction PID control instructions Special function modules instructions Example: G. INPUT, G. PRN, etc. PID57 G (P). [Instruction name] (Counter Measure) There is no alternative action. (Counter Measure) Reprogram for the special function modules to use with the QCPU. 7 - 24 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.3 Precautions for Parameter Replacement 7.3.1 Conversion from ACPU to QCPU This section explains the parameter conversion upon replacement of the ACPU programs with the QCPU. : Common item between ACPU and QCPU, that can be converted directly. r: Item that requires re-setting after the conversion, since the functions/specifications are partially different ×: Items to be deleted, since there is no common item between the ACPU and QCPU Confirm the parameters after the conversion, and correct/re-set as required. Compatibility Memory capacity Sequence program capacity r No need to care about the program capacity. Microcomputer program capacity × No microcomputer program is available. Comment capacity r Not required, since comments can be created for all devices. File register capacity r Resetting is required since the specifications are different. PLC RAS setting Remarks WDT setting r This becomes default (200ms). Operation mode when these is an error r This becomes default (All stop). Annunciator display mode × No compatible function is available. PLC system setting Name RUN - PAUSE contact r Re-setting is required. Output mode at STOP to RUN r This becomes default (Output before STOP). Data communications request batch processing r Use COM instructions or set the communication reserved time for the special register (SD315) as required. Interrupt counter setting r Re-setting is required. r Reviewing is required for the base unit with other than 8 slots. This resets to default. Correcting program is not required, since the device points are more than those of ACPU. M and L are different devices. "L" on the program is converted to "L". I/O assignment Number of device points Latch relay L Network parameter 7 - 25 Link relay B Latch range Device setting Data register D Link register W Low-speed timer High-speed timer Extension low-speed timer Extension high-speed timer r Retentive timer Extension retentive timer r Counter Extension counter r MELSECNET (II), /B × For AnUCPU, converted to the MELSCECNET/10 mode. Parameter re-setting is required for the AnNCPU and AnACPU. MELSECNET/10 (H) MELSECNET/MINI Converted as one device. Reviewing is required, since all the range from lowest device No. to highest device No. is included in the latch range. Converted as one device. Reviewing is required, since all range from lowest device No. to highest device No. is included in the latch range. Converted as one device. Reviewing is required, since the latch range covers all range from lowest device No. to highest device No. Parameters are deleted, since the QCPU is not compatible with the MELSECNET (II ), /B. × Parameters are deleted, since the QCPU is not compatible with the MELSECNET/MINI. 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.3.2 Conversion from QnACPU to QCPU This section explains the parameter conversion upon replacement of the QnACPU program with the QCPU. The symbols in the table indicate the following meanings: : Common item between QnACPU and QCPU, therefore can be converted directly r: Item that requires re-setting after the conversion, since the functions/specifications are partially different ×: Items to be deleted, since there is no common item between the QnACPU and QCPU Confirm the parameters after the conversion, and correct/re-set as required. Compatibility Remarks r Use COM instructions or set the communication reserved time for the special register (SD315) as required. r Re-setting is required. Label Timer limit setting Comment Low speed RUN-PAUSE contact PLC system setting PLC name setting Name RUN High speed PAUSE Remote reset Output mode at STOP to RUN Common pointer No. General data processing PLC file setting System interrupt setting Number of vacant slots Interrupt counter setting No. I28 Fixed scan interval I29 Fixed scan interval I30 Fixed scan interval I31 Fixed scan interval File register r Comment file used in a command r Device initial value r File for local device r Confirmation is required, since the usable target memory is changed. Confirmation is required, since the usable target memory is changed. Confirmation is required, since the usable target memory is changed. Confirmation is required, since the usable target memory is changed. 7 - 26 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT Compatibility Remarks Input relay Output relay Internal relay Latch relay Link relay Annunciator Link special relay Edge relay Step relay Timer Retentive timer Counter Data register Link register Link special register Total of device Error check WDT setting Device setting Name WDT setting Initial execution monitoring time Low speed execution monitoring time Carry out battery check Carry out fuse blown check Carry out I/O module comparison Computation error Operation mode when there is an error PLC RAS setting Expanded command error Fuse blown I/O module comparison error The name changes to "Intelligent module program execution error". Special module access error Memory card access error Memory card operation error Annunciator display mode F No. display × The QCPU does not incorporate this display function. Comment display × The QCPU does not incorporate this display function. Occurrence time × The QCPU does not incorporate this display function. Break down history Constant scanning Drive File name History No. Low speed program execution time 7 - 27 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT Name I/O assignment Compatibility Remarks r Reviewing is required if the QCPU base unit has other than 8 slots. × Parameters are deleted, since the QCPU is not compatible with the MESECNET (II), /B. Boot file setting SFC setting Program setting SFC program start mode Start conditions Output mode when the block is stopped MELSECNET (II), /B Network parameter 7 MELSECNET/10 (H) Converted to the MELSECNET/10 mode. MELSECNET/MINI × CC-Link r Ethernet Parameters are deleted, since the QCPU is not compatible with the MESECNET/MINI. CC-Link parameters are deleted for the 5th unit and the following units. The "Use the KeepAlive" of "TCP Existence confirmation setting" in the "Ethernet operations" is automatically set. 7 - 28 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.4 Special Relay Replacement The special relay is an internal relay that has a set application in a PLC. This section explains how to replace special relays when replacing the ACPU programs to the QCPU. 7.4.1 Replacing the ACPU with the QCPU The QCPU uses a different special relay from the one for the ACPU. With the Change PLC type, the automatic conversion is applied to the replacement of the ACPU special relay (M9000 and after) with the QCPU special relay (SM). (1) Operation procedure The following dialog box is displayed after changing PLC type. Click [Yes] to execute the Change PLC type after checking "Convert M9000/D9000←→Q/QnACPU special devices". Point 1) Some ACPU special relays are not compatible with the QCPU. (Refer to Section 7.4.3.) Those special relays not compatible with the QCPU are converted to dummy special relays (SM1255) *1 when changing PLC type. Search the dummy special relays (SM1255) and correct the programs as required. *1 For the Basic model QCPU, it is converted to the SM999. 2) Special Relay Replacement List (Refer to Section 7.4.3) is explained using the GX Developer version 8.25B or later. 7.4.2 Replacing the QnACPU with the QCPU Basically, special relays for the QnACPU can be used without modification in the QCPU. Note that, however, some of them are not compatible with the QCPU. 7 - 29 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.4.3 Special Relay Replacement List : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special relay ACPU QCPU Compati- Name bility Meaning OFF : Normal M9000 SM60 r Fuse blown ON : Module with blown fuse M9002 M9004 SM61 SM1255 SM999 r × I/O module verification OFF : Normal error ON : Error NIMI link error SM53 r AC DOWN detection OFF : Normal – ON : Error detected ON : AC DOWN detected M9006 SM52 Battery low M9007 SM51 r Battery low latch M9008 SM1 r Self-diagnosis error M9009 SM62 OFF : Normal ON : Battery low OFF : Normal ON : Battery low OFF : No error detected ON : F number detected M9011 SM56 M9012 SM700 M9016 M9017 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 M9020 SM420 M9021 SM421 M9022 SM422 M9023 SM423 M9024 SM424 M9025 SM210 r Operation error flag Carry flag × Data memory clear flag × Data memory clear flag ON : Error OFF : Carry OFF ON : Carry ON M9028 SM999 SM213 • Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the specified. • Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter. • Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is executed. • Switched off when SD63 data is zeroed. • Carry flag used in application instruction. – ON : Output claered OFF : lgnored – ON : Output claered User timing clock No.0 User timing clock No.1 User timing clock n2 scan n2 scan • Relay which repeats on/off at intervals of predetermined scan. • When power is turned on or reset is per-formed, the clock starts with off. Set the intervals of on/off by DUTY instruction. No.2 n1 scan User timing clock DUTY n1 n2 SM1020 n1: ON scan interval n2: OFF scan interval No.3 User timing clock No.4 Clock data set request SM211 SM1255 • Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the specified. • Turns OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter. OFF : lgnored ON : Set request present used M9027 • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module. • Reset when power is switched OFF, then ON. • Turned on when operation error occurs during execution of application instruction. • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. OFF : No error OFF : Ignored M9026 • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs during use of the AC power supply module. • Reset when power is switched OFF, then ON. • Turned on when error is found as a result of selfdiagnosis. ON : Error OFF : No F number Annunciator detection • Turned on when there is one or more output modules of which fuse has been blown. • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. • Output modules of remote I/O stations are also checked fore fuse condition. • Turned on if the status of I/O module is different form entered status when power is turned on. • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. • I/O module verification is done also to remote I/O station modules. • Reset is enabled only when the special registers SD1400 to SD1407 (for the Basic model QCPU: SD150 to SD157) are reset. OFF : AC DOWN not M9005 Explanation Clock data error × Clock data display Clock data read request OFF : No error ON : Error OFF : Ignored ON : Display OFF : Ignored ON : Read request • Writes the clock data stored in SD210 to SD213 to the CPU module after the END instruction is executed in the scan in which SM210 turned from OFF to ON. • Switched on by clock data SD210 to SD213 error – • Reads clock data to SD210 to SD213 in BCD when SM213 is on. 7 - 30 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special relay ACPU QCPU Compati- Name bility Meaning Explanation OFF : Batch processing M9029 SM1255 SM999 × Batch processing of data not conducted communications requests ON : Batch processing – conducted M9030 SM410 0.1 second clock 0.05s M9031 SM411 0.2 second clock 0.1s 0.05s • 0.1 second, 0.2 second, 1 second and 2 second, clocks are generated. • Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even during scan if corresponding time has elapsed. • Starts with off when PLC power supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed. 0.1s M9032 SM412 1 second clock 0.5s 0.5s M9033 SM413 2 second clock 1s 1s 1 minute clock ns SM400 Always ON ON OFF M9037 SM401 Always OFF ON OFF M9038 SM402 M9039 SM403 M9040 SM206 M9034 SM414 M9036 r ON for 1 scan only after RUN RUN flag (After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only) PAUSE enable coil • Alternates between ON and OFF according to the seconds specified at SD414. (Default: n = 30) • Specifying SD414 as Default: Setting 30 makes 1 minute clock (30 seconds ON, 30 seconds OFF). • Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even during scan if corresponding time has elapsed. • Starts with off when PLC power supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed. ns ON OFF 1 scan ON OFF 1 scan OFF : PAUSE disabled ON : PAUSE enabled OFF : PAUSE not in M9041 SM204 PAUSE status contact • Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application instruction in sequence program. • SM400 and SM401 are turned on and off without regard to position of RUN/STOP switch. SM402 and SM403 are under the same condition as RUN status except when the RUN/STOP switch is at STOP position, and turned off and on. Switched off if the RUN/STOP switch is in STOP position. SM402 is on for one scan only and SM403 is off for one scan only if the key switch is not in STOP position. effect • If SM206 is on when the remote PAUSE or PAUSE contact is turned on by the GX Developer, the CPU module goes to PAUSE status and SM204 turns on. ON : PAUSE in effect M9042 OFF : STOP not in effect SM203 STOP status contact SM805 Sampling trace progress SM999 completed ON : Sampling trace ON : STOP in effect OFF : Sampling trace in M9043 completed OFF → ON : M9044 STRA Same as execution SM803 Sampling trace SM999 ON → OFF : STRAR Same as execution M9045 M9046 SM1255 SM999 × Watchdog timer (WDT) OFF : Does not reset WDT reset ON : Resets WDT • Switched on when the RUN/STOP switch is in STOP position. • Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed the number of times preset by parameter after STRA instruction is executed. Reset when STRAR instruction is executed. • Turning on/off SM803 can execute STRA / STRAR instruction. (SM803 is forcibly turned on/off by a peripheral device.) When switched from OFF to ON: STRA instruction When switched from ON to OFF: STRAR instruction – OFF : Trace not in SM802 Sampling trace SM999 progress • Switched on during sampling trace. ON : Trace in progress OFF : Sampling trace M9047 SM801 Sampling trace suspended SM999 preparations ON : Sampling trace • Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned ON. Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF. started M9049 M9051 7 - 31 SM701 Selection of number of SM999 characters output SM1255 SM999 × • When SM701 is OFF, characters up to NULL (00H) code are output. • When SM701 is ON, ASCII codes of 16 characters are ON : 16 characters output output. OFF : Output until NULL code encountered CHG instruction OFF : Enabled execution disable ON : Disable – 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special relay ACPU M9052 M9054 M9055 Compati- QCPU bility SM1255 × SM999 Explanation SEG instruction switch display – ON : I/O partial refresh OFF : STEP RUN not in STEP RUN flag SM999 SM999 Meaning OFF : 7SEG segment SM205 SM1255 Name effect • Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN position. ON : STEP RUN in effect × Status latch completion OFF : Not completed flag ON : Completed – OFF : Other than when P, M9056 SM1255 SM999 × Main side P, I set request I set being requested ON : P, I set being – requested OFF : Other than when P, M9057 SM1255 SM999 × Sub side P, I set request I set being requested ON : P, I set being – requested M9058 M9059 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 × × Main side P, I set Momentarily ON at P, I completion set completion Sub program P, I set Momentarily ON at P, I completion set completion – – OFF : Other than when P, M9060 SM1255 SM999 × Sub program 2 P, I set I set being requested request ON : P, I set being – requested OFF : Other than when P, M9061 SM1255 SM999 × Sub program 3 P, I set I set being requested request ON : P, I set being – requested OFF : Divided processing M9065 SM1255 SM999 × Divided processing not underway execution detection ON : During divided × Divided processing OFF : Batch processing request flag ON : Divided processing × A8UPU/A8PUJrequired shortened search time ON : Read time – processing M9066 SM1255 SM999 – OFF : Read time not M9070 SM1255 SM999 – shortened OFF : Empty spaces in M9081 SM1255 SM999 Communication request × registration area BUSY signal communication request registration area ON : No empty spaces in – communication request registration area M9084 M9091 M9094 M9100 M9101 SM1255 SM999 OFF : Error check × Error check × Instruction error flag SM1255 × I/O change flag SM320 SM321 – ON : No error check SM1 SM999 executed Presence/absence of SFC program Start/stop SFC program OFF : No error ON : Error OFF : Replacement ON : No replacement – – OFF : SFC programs not used • Turned on if the SFC program is registered. • Turned off if it is not. ON : SFC programs used OFF : SFC programs stop ON : SFC programs start • The value in SM320 is set as the initial value. (The relay automatically turns ON when the SFC program is present.) • When this relay turns from ON to OFF, execution of the SFC program stops. • When this relay turns from OFF to ON, execution of the SFC program resumes. 7 - 32 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special relay ACPU QCPU M9102 SM322 Compati- Name bility SFC program start status Meaning Explanation • The SFC program start mode in the SFC setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is set as the initial value. At initial start: OFF At continue start: ON OFF : Initial Start ON : Continue OFF : Continuous M9103 SM323 Presence/absence of transition not effective continuous transition ON : Continuous • Set whether continuous transition will be performed for the block where the "continuous transition bit" of the SFC information device is not set. transition effective M9104 M9108 M9109 M9110 M9111 M9112 M9113 M9114 M9180 Continuous transition SM324 suspension flag ON : When no transition timer start (equivalent of SM999 SD90) Step transition watchdog SM91 timer start (equivalent of SM999 SD91) Step transition watchdog SM92 timer start (equivalent of SM999 SD92) Step transition watchdog SM93 timer start (equivalent of SM999 SD93) Step transition watchdog SM94 OFF: Watchdog timer reset ON: Watchdog timer reset start • Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition watchdog timer is started. Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition watchdog timer. timer start (equivalent of SM999 SD94) Step transition watchdog SM95 timer start (equivalent of SM999 SD95) Step transition watchdog SM96 timer start (equivalent of SM999 SM999 completed • OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode or during continuous transition, and ON when continuous transition is not executed. • Always ON during operation in the no continuous transition mode. Step transition watchdog SM90 SM1255 OFF : When transition is SD96) × Active step sampling OFF: Trace started trace completion flag ON: Trace completed – OFF: Trace not being M9181 SM1255 SM999 × Active step sampling executed trace execution flag ON: Trace execution – under way M9182 SM1255 SM999 × Active step sampling trace permission OFF: Trace disable/ suspend – ON: Trace enable • Selects the operation output when block stop is executed. ON : Retains the ON/OFF status of the coil being M9196 SM325 Operation output at block OFF: Coil output OFF stop OON: Coil output ON used by using operation output of the step being executed at block stop. OFF : All coil outputs are turned off. (Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON/OFF status of SM325.) SM1255 SM999 M9197 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 M9198 SM999 SM1255 SM999 7 - 33 I/O numbers × M9117 M9118 to be displayed × × × × Switch between blown fuse and I/O verification error display OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON X/Y0 to 7F0 X/Y800 to FF0 X/Y1000 to 17F0 X/Y1800 to 1FF0 – 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special relay ACPU M9199 QCPU SM1255 SM999 Compati- Name bility Data recovery of online × sampling trace/status latch Meaning Explanation OFF: Data recovery disabled ON: Data recovery – enabled ZNRD instruction (LRDP M9200 SM1255 SM999 × instruction for ACPU) OFF: Not accepted reception (for master ON: Accepted – station) ZNRD instruction (LRDP M9201 SM1255 SM999 × instruction for ACPU) OFF: Not completed completion (for master ON: End – station) ZNWR instruction (LWTP M9202 SM1255 SM999 × instruction for ACPU) OFF: Not accepted reception (for master ON: Accepted – station) ZNWR instruction (LWTP M9203 SM1255 SM999 × instruction for ACPU) OFF: Not completed completion (for master ON: End – station) ZNRD instruction (LRDP M9204 SM1255 SM999 × instruction for ACPU) OFF: Not completed reception (for local ON: End – station) ZNWR instruction (LWTP M9205 SM1255 SM999 × instruction for ACPU) OFF: Not completed reception (for local ON: End – station) M9206 M9207 M9208 M9209 M9210 M9211 M9224 M9225 M9226 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 × × × Host station link OFF: Normal parameter error ON: Abnormal Link parameter check OFF : Match results ON : Mismatch Sets master station B and OFF: Transmits to tier2 W transmission range and tier 3 (for lower link master ON: Transmits to tier2 stations only) only Link parameter check × command (for lower link master stations only) × × – – – OFF: Executing the check function ON: Check non- – execution Link card error (for OFF: Normal master station) ON: Abnormal Link module error (for OFF: Normal local station use) ON: Abnormal Link status ON: Offline,station-to-station – – OFF: Online × – test, or self-loopback test × Forward loop error × Reverse loop error OFF: Normal ON: Abnormal OFF: Normal ON: Abnormal – – OFF: Not being executed M9227 SM1255 SM999 × Loop test status ON: Forward or reverse loop test execution – underway OFF: RUN or STEP RUN M9232 SM1255 SM999 × Local station operation status status ON: STOP or PAUSE – status M9233 SM1255 SM999 Local station error detect × status OFF: No errors ON: Error detection – 7 - 34 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special relay ACPU M9235 M9236 M9237 M9238 Compati- QCPU bility SM1255 × SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 Name Local station, remote I/O station parameter error detect status × × OFF: No errors ON: Error detection Local station, remote I/O OFF: No communications station initial ON: Communications communications status underway Local station, remote I/O OFF: Normal station error ON: Abnormal Local station, remote I/O × Meaning station forward or reverse loop error OFF: Normal ON: Abnormal Explanation – – – – OFF: Online M9240 SM1255 SM999 × Link status ON: Offline, station-tostationtest, or self- – loopback test M9241 M9242 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 × Forward loop line error × Reverse loop line error OFF: Normal ON: Abnormal OFF: Normal ON: Abnormal – – OFF: Loopback not being M9243 SM1255 SM999 × Loopback implementation conducted ON: Loopback – implementation M9246 M9247 M9250 M9251 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 × Data not received × Data not received × Parameters not received × Link relay OFF: Reception ON: No reception OFF: Reception ON: No reception OFF: Reception ON: No reception OFF: Normal ON: Abnormal – – – – OFF: Not being executed M9252 SM1255 SM999 × Loop test status ON: Forward or reverse loop test execution – underway OFF: RUN or STEP RUN M9253 SM1255 SM999 × Master station operation status status ON: STOP or PAUSE – status M9254 M9255 7 - 35 SM1255 SM999 SM1255 SM999 Local station other than × host station operation status × OFF: RUN or STEP RUN status ON: STOP or PAUSE – status Local station other than OFF: Normal host station error ON: Abnormal – 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.5 Special Register Replacement A special register is an internal register that has a set application in a PLC. This section explains how to replace (reuse) the special registers of the A series programs with the Q series. 7.5.1 Replacing the ACPU with the QCPU The QCPU uses a different special register from the one for the ACPU. With the Change PLC type, the automatic conversion is applied to the replacement of the ACPU special register (D9000 and after) with the QCPU special register (SD). (1) Operation procedure The following dialog box is displayed after changing PLC type. Click [Yes] to execute the Change PLC type after checking "Convert M9000/D9000←→Q/QnACPU special devices". Point 1) Some ACPU special registers are not compatible with the QCPU. (Refer to Section 7.5.3.) Those special registers not compatible with the QCPU are converted to dummy special registers (SD1255) *1 when changing PLC type. Search the dummy special registers (SD1255) and correct the programs as required. *1 For the Basic model QCPUs, converted to the SD999. 2) Special Register Replacement List (Refer to Section 7.5.3) is explained using GX Developer version 8.25B or later. 7.5.2 Replacing the QnACPU with the QCPU Basically, special registers for the QnACPU can be used without modification in the QCPU. Note that, however, some of them are not compatible with the QCPU. 7 - 36 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.5.3 Special Register Replacement List : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special register ACPU D9000 D9001 D9002 D9004 QCPU Compati- SD60 SD1255 SD999 Fuse blown × SD61 SD1255 SD999 D9005 SD53 D9008 SD0 Name bility × Fuse blown Number of module with blown fuse Number of module with blown fuse I/O module verification I/O module verification error error module number MINI link errors AC DOWN counter r Meaning Self-diagnosis error Stores setting status made at parameters Number of times for AC SD62 Annunciator detection D9011 D9014 7 - 37 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 – • If I/O modules, of which data are different from data entered, are detected when the power is turned on, the first I/O number of the lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in hexadecimal. (Storing method is the same as that of SD60.) To monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal. (Cleared when all contents of SD1400 to SD1407 (SD150 to SD157) are reset to 0.) • I/O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote I/O terminals. – • When the AC power supply module is used, 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms. It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON. • When the DC power supply module is used, 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms. It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON. Self-diagnosis error • When error is found as a result of self-diagnosis, error number is stored in BIN code. number external failure has occurred D9010 • When fuse blown modules are detected, the first I/O number of the lowest number of the detected modules is stored in hexadecimal. (Example: When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown, "50" is stored in hexadecimal) To monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal. (Cleared when all contents of SD1300 to SD1307 (SD130 to SD137) are reset to 0.) • Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I/O stations. DOWN F number at which D9009 Explanation • When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or SET F , the F number, which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on, is stored in BIN code. • SD62 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruction. If another F number has been detected, the clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored in SD62. Step number at which × Error step operation error has – occurred. Step number at which × Error step operation error has – occurred. × I/O control mode I/O control mode number – 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special register ACPU QCPU Compatibility Name Meaning Explanation • The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored in SD203. b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 Remote RUN/STOP by computer D9015 SD203 Operating status of CPU Operating status of CPU 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 PAUSE 1 Except below 1 STOP Instruction execution b0 CPU key switch 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 PAUSE 1 3 STEP RUN Remains the same in remote RUN/STOP mode. Remote RUN/STOP by parameter setting Status in program 0 to 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 PAUSE 1 *1: When the CPU mdoule is in RUN mode and SM1040 is off, the CPU module remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode. 0: Main program (ROM) 1: Main program (RAM) 2: Subprogram 1 (RAM) 3: Subprogram 2 (RAM) 4: Subprogram 3 (RAM) 5: Subprogram 1 (ROM) 6: Subprogram 2 (ROM) D9016 SD1255 SD999 × Program number 7: Subprogram 3 (ROM) – 8: Main program (E2PROM) 9: Subprogram 1 (E2PROM) A: Subprogram 2 (E2PROM) B: Subprogram 3 (E2PROM) D9017 SD524 r Scan time D9018 SD520 r Scan time D9019 SD526 r Scan time × Constant scan × Scan time D9020 D9021 D9022 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD412 1 second counter Minimum scan time (10 ms units) Scan time (10 ms units) Maximum scan time (10 ms units) • If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520, the value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the minimum value of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN code. (1ms unit) • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and always rewritten. (1ms unit) • If scan time is larger than the content of SD526, the value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN code. (1ms unit) Constant scan time – (User sets in 10 ms units) Scan time (1 ms units) Count in units of 1s. • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and always rewritten. • When the PLC CPU starts running, it starts counting 1 every second. • It starts counting up from 0 to 32767, then down to -32768 and then again up to 0. Counting repeats this routine. • Stores the year (2 lower digits) and month in BCD. D9025 SD210 Clock data Clock data b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 (year, month) Year Example: 1987, July H8707 Month • Stores the day and hour in BCD. D9026 SD211 Clock data Clock data b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 (day, hour) Day Example: 31st, 10 a.m. H3110 Hour 7 - 38 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special register ACPU QCPU Compati- Name bility Meaning Explanation • Stores the minute and second in BCD. D9027 SD212 Clock data Clock data b15 to b12 b11 to b4 b3 to b0 Example: b8 b7 to 35 min., 48 sec. H3548 (minute, second) Minute Second • Stores the year (two digits) and the day of the week in SD213 in the BCD code format as shown below. b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 b4 b3 to to b0 Example: 1993, Friday Clock data D9028 SD213 r Clock data of week) D9035 D9036 D9037 D9038 SD648 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD207 Extension file register × Extension file registerfor designation of device × number Use block No. Higher digits of year (0 to 99) • Stores the block No. of the extension file register being used in BCD code. individual devices from – extension file register are directly accessed • Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate (or flicker) to indicate errors with error code numbers. • Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below. LED display priority SD207 ranking SD208 D9039 D9044 D9049 D9050 D9051 D9052 D9053 D9054 D9055 D9060 D9072 D9081 D9085 D9090 D9091 7 - 39 SD208 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 Priorities 5 to 7 r Step or time during × For sampling trace × Work area for SFC × SFC program error Error code generated by number SFC program × Error block × Error step × Error transition sampling trace Block number of extension file register Block number where error occurred Step number where error occurred b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 Priority 7 number where error – – – – – – occurred Error sequence step × Status latch × Software version × PLC communications × × × × check Sequence step number where error occurred Status latch step Software version of internal software Computer link data check Number of empty blocks Number of empty blocks in communications in communications request registrtion area request registration area Register for setting time check value 1 s to 65535 s Number of special Number of special functions modules over functions modules over Detailed error code Self-diagnosis detailed error code Priority 6 Priority 5 • For details, refer to the applicable QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) and the ACPU Programming manual (Fundamentals). Transition condition × Day of the week 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Device number when Priorities 1 to 4 r 1905H (higher digits of year, day – – – – – – – – 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special register ACPU D9094 D9095 D9100 D9101 D9102 D9103 D9104 D9105 D9106 D9107 D9108 D9109 D9110 D9111 D9112 D9113 D9114 D9116 D9117 D9118 D9119 D9120 D9121 D9122 D9123 – D9124 Compati- QCPU bility SD1255 × SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1300 SD130 SD1301 SD131 SD1302 SD132 SD1303 SD133 SD1304 SD134 SD1305 SD135 SD1306 SD136 SD1307 SD137 SD90 SD999 SD91 SD999 SD92 SD999 SD93 SD999 SD94 SD999 SD95 SD999 SD96 SD999 SD1400 SD150 SD1401 SD151 SD1402 SD152 SD1403 SD153 SD1404 SD154 SD1405 SD155 SD1406 SD156 SD1407 SD157 SD62 SD63 × Name Meaning Head I/O number of I/O Head I/O number of I/O module to be replaced module to be replaced DIP switch information DIP switch information r Explanation – – • The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are input as a bit pattern (in units of 16 points). (If the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameterset numbers are stored.) r r Bit pattern in units of 16 r Fuse blown module r points, indicating the modules whose fuses have blown SD1300 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 1 1 0 0 0 (YC0) 0 0 0 (Y80) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 SD1301 (Y1F0) SD1307 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Y7B0) 1 (Y1A0) 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Y730) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Indicates fuse blow. r • Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module of remote I/O station. Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one. This flag is cleared by error resetting operation. r r • Convert to the corresponding special register (SD90 to SD96). • Set the set value of the step transition watchdog timer and the annunciator number (F number) that will turn on when the watchdog timer times out. r r r b15 r Step transfer monitoring Timer setting valve and timer setting the f number at time out to b8 b7 F number setting (02 to 255) r to b0 Timer time limit setting (1 to 255 s:(1 s units)) • By turning on any of SM90 to SM96, the monitoring timer starts. If the transfer condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time, set annunciator (F) is tuned on. r r • When I/O modules, of which data are different from those entered at power-on, have been detected, the I/O module numbers (in units of 16 points) are entered in bit pattern. (Preset I/O module numbers set in parmeters when parameter setting has been performed.) r r r r r Bit pattern, in units of 16 I/O module verification points, indicating the error modules with verification errors. SD1407 0 ( X Y) 0 7E0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • I/O module verify check is executed also to remote I/O station modules. • Not cleared even if the module status becomes normal again. This flag is cleared by error resetting operation. r r r 190 1 Indicates an I/O module verification error r – b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (X Y) 0 1 SD1401 0 0 0 0 0 0 ( X Y) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SD1400 Annunciator number Annunciator quantity Annunciator number • The annunciator number (F number), which has been detected earliest, is stored. Annunciator quantity • When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by [SET F], 1 is added to the contents of SD63. When [RST F] or [LEDR] instruction is executed, 1 is subtracted from the contents of SD63. Quantity, which has been turned on by [SET F], is stored up to 16. 7 - 40 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special register Compati- ACPU QCPU bility D9125 SD64 r D9126 SD65 r D9127 SD66 r Name Meaning Explanation • When F is turned on by [OUT F] or [SET F], the F numbers that are turned on in order are registered into SD64 to SD79. The F number turned off by [RST F] is erased from any of SD64 to SD79, and the F numbers stored after the erased F number are shifted to the preceding registerers. By executing [LEDR] instruction, the contents of SD64 to SD79 are shifted upward by one. When there are 16 annunciator detections, the 17th one is not stored into SD64 to SD79 even if detected. SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR D9128 SD67 r D9129 SD68 r D1930 SD69 r D9131 SD70 r D9132 SD71 r Annunciator detection Annunciator detection number number SD62 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 (Detection number) SD63 0 1 (Detection quantity) SD64 SD65 SD66 SD67 SD68 SD69 SD70 SD71 SD72 SD73 SD74 SD75 SD76 SD77 SD78 SD79 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 data link data link 2 : Loopback implemented SD999 × Link status in forward/reverse directions – 3 : Loopback implemented only in forward direction 4 : Loopback implemented only inreverse direction 5 : Data link disabled D9205 D9206 D9210 D9211 D9212 D9213 D9214 D9215 D9216 D9217 D9218 D9219 7 - 41 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 × × Station implementing Station that implemented loopback forward loopback Station implementing Station that implemented loopback reverse loopback Stored as cumulative × Number of retries × Number of times loop Stored as cumulative selected value Local station operation Stores conditions for up status to numbers 1 to 16 Local station operation Stores conditions for up status to numbers 17 to 32 Local station operation Stores conditions for up status to numbers 33 to 48 Local station operation Stores conditions for up status to numbers 49 to 64 Local station error detect Stores conditions for up status to numbers 1 to 16 × × × × × × Local station error detect status × Local station error detect status × 8 • For Q series, stored quantity has been increased from 8 to 16. Review the program related to the quantity check. 1 : Reverse loop, during SD1255 9 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 65 A series replacement 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 38 area 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210 (Detection number) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q series 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 expansion 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : Forward loop, during D9204 8 value – – – – Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 – Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Local station error detect Stores conditions for up status to numbers 49 to 64 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT : Compatible, r: Partial change required, ×: Incompatible Special register ACPU D9220 D9221 D9222 D9223 D9224 D9225 D9226 D9227 D9228 D9229 D9230 D9231 D9232 D9233 D9234 D9235 D9236 D9237 D9238 D9239 D9240 D9241 D9242 D9243 D9244 D9245 Compati- QCPU bility SD1255 × SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 SD1255 SD999 Name Local station parameters non-conforming; remote I/O station I/O allocation error Local station parameters × non-conforming; remote I/O station I/O allocation error Local station parameters × non-conforming; remote I/O station I/O allocation error Local station parameters × non-conforming; remote I/O station I/O allocation error Local station and remote × I/O station initial communications underway Local station and remote × I/O station initial communications underway Local station and remote × I/O station initial communications underway Local station and remote × I/O station initial communications underway × × × × × × × × × × × × to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 – Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 – Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up I/O station error to numbers 1 to 16 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station error to numbers 17 to 32 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station error to numbers 33 to 48 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station error to numbers 49 to 64 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station loop error to numbers 1 to 8 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station loop error to numbers 9 to 16 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station loop error to numbers 17 to 24 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station loop error to numbers 25 to 32 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station loop error to numbers 33 to 40 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station loop error to numbers 41 to 48 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station loop error to numbers 49 to 56 Local station and remote Stores conditions for up I/O station loop error to numbers 57 to 64 communications errors detected Stores cumulative total of receive errors Local station link type × Local station link type × Station number information Stores station number (0 to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to 64) Number of link device Stores number of slave stations stations communications errors detected – – – to numbers 49 to 64 for host station Number of times × – Stores conditions for up × × Explanation Stores conditions for up Local station and remote Number of times × Meaning Stores cumulative total of receive errors – – – 7 - 42 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.6 Precautions for Replacing the MELSAP-II with the MELSAP3 The basic operation of the MELSAP3 is the same as the MELSAP-II , but the specifications are partially defferent. This section provides the precautions for the replacement. 7.6.1 Starting SFC Program The SFC program can be started by using the special relay for starting/stopping the SFC program. That special replay for the ACPU (M9101) is replaced with the special relay for the QCPU (SM321) upon converting from the ACPU to QCPU. The specifications of the special relay differ between the two CPUs. Specifications MELSAP-II (M9101) Precautions for replacement MELSAP3 (SM321) Switches on and off with user SFC program starts up at default, When starting/stopping the SFC program operation. since system is automatically turned according to user conditions, turn the SM321 on. to on/off with program. 7.6.2 Block Information (SFC Information Device) The MELSAP-II and MELSAP3 have different method of executing the "Block START/STOP" and "Reading of the number of active steps and active step numbers" with block information (SFC information device). Specifications MELSAP-II MELSAP3 Precautions for replacement Block START/ [START] [START] [START] STOP methods Switching the block active bit on, Switching the block START/ Adjusting program is not executes forced start. STOP bit on starts the required when replacing the SFC [STOP] concerned block forcibly. program of the ACPU with the Switching the block clear bit on, [STOP] QCPU, since in that case, the stops the block also switching Switching the block START/ "Block active bit" is replaced with from on to off executes forced STOP bit off stops the the "Block START/STOP bit". stop. concerned block [STOP] forcibly. Add the program that resets the "Block START/STOP bit" to the "Block clear bit". Delete the program that switches the "Block clear bit "on/off. The number of Reads the number of active Reads only the number of active To read the active step numbers, active steps steps in the corresponding block steps in the corresponding block. use the "Active step batch and active step and active step numbers. numbers reading 7 - 43 readout instructions (MOV, DMOV, BMOV)". 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT Memo 7 - 44 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.7 Precautions for Program Replacement 7.7.1 List of Applicable Devices Device name QCPU QnACPU Q02 Q02H Q06H Number of I/O points*9 – Q00JCPU: 256 points Q12H Q00CPU: 1024 points Q25H Q01CPU: 1024 points Q12PH Q3A: 2048 points Q25PH Q4A: 4096 points Q2A: 512 points 4096 points Q2A-S1: 1024 points Q12PRH Q25PRH Number of I/O device 2048 points points*8 8192 points 8192 points*1 Internal relay Latch relay Sequence Step relay program 2048 points*1 8192 points*1 – – 2048 points*6 8192 points 1024 points*1 2048 points*1 Edge relay 1024 points*1 2048 points*1 Link relay 2048 points*1 8192 points*1 SFC Annunciator Special relays for link 1024 points 2048 points Timer 512 points*1 2048 points*1 0 point*1 Retentive timer 512 points*1 1024 points*1 Data register 11136 points*1 12288 points*1 Link register 2048 points*1 8192 points*1 Counter Link special register 1024 points 2048 points 16 points (FX0 to FXF) *7 Function inputs 16 points (FY0 to FYF) *7 Function outputs Special relay 1000 points Function registers 2048 points 5 points (FD0 to FD4) Special register 1000 points 2048 points Link direct device Specified from J£\G£ Special direct devices Index register File register Specified from U£\G£ Z V*2 10 points (Z0 to Z9) 16 points (Z0 to Z15) – – 32768 points/block*5 32768 points/block (R0 to R32767) (R0 to R32767) Accumulator*3 – Nesting 15 points Pointer 300 points Interrupt pointer 128 points SFC block SFC transition device 4096 points 256 points 126 points*6 – Decimal constant 512 points K-2147483648 to K2147483647 Hexadecimal constant 7 - 45 48 points 320 points H0 to HFFFFFFFF Real constant*6 E±1.17550–38 to E±3.40282+38 Character string "QnACPU","ABCD"*4 *1 The number of points for use can be changed with parameters. *2 "V" is used for edge relays for the QCPU/QnACPU. *3 The format of instructions that use the accumulator for the AnNCPU/AnACPU/AnUCPU is changed for the Q/QnACPU. *4 For the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, and Q01CPU, they can be used with the $MOV instruction. *5 The Q00JCPU does not have file registers. 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT AnUCPU AnACPU – AnNCPU – A1N: 256 points A2U: 512 points A2A: 512 points A2N: 512 points A2U-S1: 1024 points A2A-S1: 1024 points A2N-S1: 1024 points A3U: 2048 points A3A: 2048 points A3N: 2048 points A4U: 4096 points – 8192 points – Same I/O device points of applicable CPU module Total 2048 points Total 8192 points – – 2048 points 256 points – 8192 points 4096 points 1024 56 points Total 2048 points Total 256 points 1024 points 256 points 8192 points 6144 points 1024 points 8192 points 4096 points 1024 points 56 points – – 256 points – 256 points – – 7 points (Z,Z1 to Z6) 1 point (Z) 7 points (V,V1 to V6) 1 point (V) 8192 points/block (R0 to R8191) 2 points 8 points 256 points 32 points – – K-2147483648 to K2147483647 H0 to HFFFFFFFF – – *6 Applicable to the first 5 digits of serial number (Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU) of 04122 or higher. *7 Each 5 points of FX0 to FX4 and FY0 to FY4 can be used on the programs. *8 The number of points that can be used on the programs *9 The number of accessible points to actual I/O modules 7 - 46 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.7.2 I/O Control Method : Usable, –: Not usable I/O control method QCPU QnACPU AnUCPU AnACPU AnNCPU *2 Refresh mode Pertial refresh instructions Direct I/O Dedicated instructions*1 method Direct access input – – – – Direct access output Direct mode *1 – – – – – – – – – *2 The direct output dedicated instructions include the DOUT, DSET and SRST instruction and do not include the direct input dedicated instructions. *2 The DIP switch on the AnNCPU enables to switch between refresh mode and direct mode. 7.7.3 Usable Data Format for Instructions : Usable, r : Condicional usable, –: Not usalbe Setting data QCPU QnACPU AnUCPU AnACPU AnNCPU – – – Bit device Bit data Word data Word device Bit device (Bit designation required) (Digit designation required) (Digit (Digit (Digit designation designation designation required) required) required) Word device Double-word data Bit device (Digit designation required) (Digit (Digit (Digit designation designation designation required) required) required) – – – Word device 7 - 47 Real number data *1 Character string data *2 r *1 Applicable to the first 5 digits of serial number (Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU) of 04122 or higher. *2 For the Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, it can be used with the $MOV instruction. 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.7.4 Timer Function Measurement unit Low-speed QCPU/QnACPU • 100ms (Default) Changeable in the range of 1 to 1000ms (Parameter) (QnACPU: 10 to 1000ms) AnUCPU AnACPU AnNCPU • Fixed to 100ms timer K100 T0 Specifying method Measurement unit High-speed • 10ms (Default) Changeable in the range of 0.1 to 100ms (parameter) (QnACPU: 1 to 100ms) Specifying H T0 method ment unit • Fixed to 10ms Specifying the high speed timer timer Measure- K100 T0 K100 T200 K100 • The same measurement unit as lowspeed timer • Fixed to 100ms Retentive timer Specifying K100 ST0 method Measurement unit • The same measurement unit as highspeed timer High-speed retentive timer Specifying H ST0 method Setting range for set value Processing the set value 0 Updating present value ON/OFF processing for K100 T0 Specifying the high speed timer K100 • None • 1 to 32767 • Instant-ON • 1 to 32767 • Infinite (No time up) • When executing the OUT Tn instruction • When executing the END processing contact (1) Precautions for using timer (a) Q/QnACPU timer ladder programming method Set the number of points for the timer and retentive timer in the Device setting of the parameter setting. To use the low-speed timer, high-speed timer, retentive timer and high-speed retentive timer separately, add "H" or "S" to the OUT instruction in programming. Ex.) Low-speed timer :OUT T0 Kn High-speed timer :OUTH T0 Kn Low-speed retentive timer :OUT ST0 Kn High-speed retentive timer :OUTH ST0 Kn (b) ACPU timer ladder programming method Set the total number of points of timer, and the first device number of low-speed timer, high-speed timer and retentive timer in the Device setting of the parameter setting. The default setting is as follows: Number of points of timer: 256 First device number of low-speed timer: 0 (T0 to T199) First device number of high-speed timer: 200 (T200 to T255) First device number of retentive timer: 0. When using the retentive timer, change the setting to reserve necessary number of points. 7 - 48 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.7.5 Counter Function QCPU/QnACPU AnUCPU AnACPU K100 C0 Specifying method AnNCPU K100 C0 Updating present value ON/OFF processing for • When executing the OUT Cn instruction • When executing the END instruction contact 7.7.6 Display Instructions Instruction QCPU/QnACPU AnACPU AnNCPU PR *1 • With M9049 OFF: Outputs characters before 00H. • With M9049 ON: Outputs 16 characters. PRC *1 • With SM701 OFF: Outputs comments in 32 characters. • With SM701 ON: Outputs first 16 characters of comment. • Outputs comment in 16 characters. *1 Not applicable for the Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU 7 - 49 AnUCPU • With SM701 OFF: Outputs characters before 00H. • With SM701 ON: Outputs 16 characters. 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.7.7 Instructions where Format is Changed (Excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU Dedicated Instructions) Instructions using the accumulator for the AnUCPU/AnACPU/AnNCPU are changed in their format, since the QCPU/QnACPU do not have the accumulator (A0, A1). The accumulator A0 is converted to SD718, the accumulator A1 is converted to SD719. Function QCPU/QnACPU Format of instructions Remarks AnUCPU/AnACPU/AnNCPU Format of instructions Remarks • D: Rotation data • Rotation data is set in A0. • D: Rotation data • Use SM700 for carry flag • Rotation data is set in A0. • Use M9012 for carry flag. • D: Rotation data • Rotation data is set in A0. • D: Rotation data • Use SM700 for carry flag • Rotation data is set in A0. • Use M9012 for carry flag. • D: Rotation data • Rotation data is set in A0, A1. • D: Rotation data • Use SM700 for carry flag • Rotation data is set in A0, A1. • Use M9012 for carry flag. • D: Rotation data • Rotation data is set in A0, A1. • D: Rotation data • Use SM700 for carry flag • Rotation data is set in A0, A1. • Use M9012 for carry flag. Right rotation of 16-bit data Left rotation of 16bit data Right rotation of 32-bit data Left rotation of 32bit data • Search result is stored in D, D +1 device • Search result is stored in D, D +1 device 16-bit data search 32-bit data search 16-bit data checks 32-bit data checks Partial refresh • Search result is stored in A0, A1. • Search result is stored in A0, A1. • Check result is stored in D device • Check result is stored in A0. • Check result is stored in D device • Check result is stored in A0. • Add dedicated instruction • Only when M9052 is on.*2 8-characters ASCII conversion $MOV (Charactor strings) D ASC (Charactor strings) D *3 Carry flag set • No dedicated instruction *3 Carry flag reset • No dedicated instruction *3 • Add dedicated instruction • P255: END instruction specification*3 • Add CHKST instruction *3 Jump to END instruction CHK instruction*1 *1 Not applicable to the Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU *2 Deleting or adjusting is required, since it becomes the instruction of different function. *3 Converted to "SM1255" as unconvertible instruction. 7 - 50 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.7.8 AnACPU/AnUCPU Dedicated Instruction (1) Display method of dedicated instruction The dedicated instructions for the AnACPU/AnUCPU using LEDA, LEDB, LEDC, and LEDR instructions are changed into instructions in the same format as basic instructions and application instructions for the QCPU/QnACPU. Replace or delete instructions that has been converted to the OUT SM1255/OUT SM999. QCPU/QnACPU AnACPU/AnUCPU Command Instruction name LEDA(B) Command Instruction name S D n LEDC/SUB S LEDC/SUB D LEDC/SUB n LEDR S, D, n indicate the data used in instructions. (2) Dedicated instruction with changed instruction name For the AnACPU/AnUCPU, some instruction names are the same as the basic instructions/application instructions. Those names have been changed for the QCPU/QnACPU. QCPU/QnACPU AnACPU/AnUCPU Floating decimal point addition Function E+ ADD Floating decimal point subtraction E- SUB Floating decimal point multiplication E* MUL Floating decimal point division Data dissociation Data linking Check pattern updates 7 - 51 E/ DIV NDIS DIS NUNI UNI CHKCIR,CHKEND CHK,CHKEND 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 7.7.9 Setting Method when Multiple Sequence Programs are Created For the ACPU, some programs include main program and subprogram, and main programs have SFC programs. When replacing those programs with the QCPU, they are separated into different programs. For the separated programs in the QCPU, the Program setting of the parameter setting is required. This section provides precautions after replacement of program settings, etc. (1) Program files at replacement (a) When the main program and subprogram are operated as one program in CPU Register in the order of MAIN, SUB1, SUB2 in the Program setting of the PLC parameter of GX Developer, and set all the execution types to "Scan". Default upon the registration is "Scan". Set execution order and type in the program setting of parameter. Change PLC type MAIN Main program SUB1 Subprogram1 Subprogram2 SUB2 Setting example of program setting 1 2 3 Program name Execution type MAIN Scan SUB1 Scan SUB2 Scan (b) When ACPU has interrupt program For the ACPU, the main program and subprogram have the same interrupt program. For the QCPU, delete interrupt programs except one of them, since the QCPU can assign one interrupt pointer per program. When programs of the same interrupt pointer exist, CPU will result in error when interrupt condition is satisfied. Register in order of MAIN, SUB1 in the PLC parameter program setting of the GX Developer, and set all execution type to "Scan". Change PLC type Main program Interrupt program Subprogram Interrupt program MAIN Interrupt program An error occurs when executing the interrupt program, since two same pointers exist. SUB1 Interrupt program Delete the overlapped interrupt program 7 - 52 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT (c) When main program contains SFC program For the ACPU, the SFC program operates as the microcomputer program of main program. Since the QCPU deals the SFC program as one program, the SFC program is converted to "MAINSFC". Accordingly, two separate programs are created when the ACPU is converted; "MAIN", converted from main program, and "MAIN-SFC". Register in the order of MAIN, MAIN-SFC in the Program setting of the parameter setting of GX Developer, and set all execution types to "Scan". Refer to Section 7.6 for precautions of replacing from the ACPU SFC (MELSAP-II) to the QCPU (MELSAP3). Change PLC type MAIN Set execution order and type in the program setting of parameter. Main program SFC program MAIN-SFC (2) Program setting of the GX Developer The following explains required program settings for executing multiple programs. The execution type of program is set in Program setting of the PLC parameter setting of the GX Developer. A CPU module executes the programs of the specified execution type in the setting order. (a) (b) (b) 5) (b) 5) Programs are executed in selected sequence (c) (d) (a) Program name Set a name for a program to be executed with a CPU module. (b) Execution type Select the execution type of files set in the program name. 1) Initial execution type (Initial) This type of programs is executed only one time, when switching the power supply from off to on or STOP status to RUN status. 2) Scan execution type (Scan) This type of programs is executed every scan, after having executed the initial execution type program. 3) Low speed execution type (Low speed) This type of programs is executed only when the constant scan or low speed type program execution time is set. 7 - 53 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT 4) Stand-by type (Wait) This type of program is executed only when demanded. 5) Fixed scan execution type (Fixed scan) This type of program is executed per interval set in the "Fixed scan interval" and "In unit". • Fixed scan interval ÅESets the program execution interval of fixed execution type program. ÅESetting range depends on the unit set in the fixed scan interval. • For "ms": 0.5 to 999.5ms (0.5ms unit) • For "s": 1 to 60s (1s unit) • Unit ÅESelects the unit ("ms" or "s") for the fixed scan interval. 7.7.10 Precautions for File Register Replacement This section provides precautions for replacing the ACPU or QnACPU using file registers with the QCPU. ACPU Storage destination Memory cassette Maximum number of points Depends on applicable memory cassette used Number of points for 1 block 8k points QnACPU Memory card (Up to 2 cards, 4 drives) 1018k points × 2 (When using two 2M memory cards) 32k points QCPU • Standard RAM • Memory card (1card) Standard RAM: Up to 128k points (Depending on CPU type name) 1017k points (When using a 2M memory card) 32k points (1) Changing storage destination after replacement (a) Changing storage destination after replacement of the ACPU The value whose capacity has been set with the parameter of ACPU is not converted, since the storage destination is different. Set the storage destination and capacity (points) in the file setting of the PLC parameter setting. Be sure to select "Use the following file" when setting the storage destination. Selecting "Use the following file" makes the file equivalent to the ACPU. (b) Changing storage destination after replacement of the QnACPU Drive No. for storing file registers differs between the QnACPU and QCPU. Set the parameters (Standard RAM, memory card (RAM), memory card (ROM)) according to the drive where the file register is stored. 7 - 54 7 PROGRAM REPLACEMENT (2) Maximum number of points 1) Maximum number of points after replacement of the ACPU For the ACPU with the memory cassette A4UMCA-128, the memory capacity is 1MB. When replacing the ACPU with the QCPU, installing the SRAM card of 1MB or more secures the file register capacity of the ACPU. 2) Maximum number of points after replacement of the QnACPU When two memory cards have been installed and files have been switched in using, the maximum number of points may not be secured after replacing the QnACPU with the QCPU. (3) Number of points for one block 1) Number of points for one block after replacement of the ACPU For the ACPU with the extension file registers, the number of points for one block is 8k points. For the QCPU, the number of points for one block is 32k points. 2) Number of points for one block after replacement of the QnACPU Definition of file register capacity is the same for the QnACPU and QCPU. When the storage destination and maximum number of points are the same, program adjustment for file registers is not required. 7.7.11 Boot Run Method (Writing Programs to ROM) The ROM operation of the ACPU corresponds to the boot run of the QCPU. The overview of the boot run is explained below. Refer to QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) for details. (1) QCPU boot run procedure Step 1: Setting Boot file In the Boot file setting of the PLC parameter of the GX Developer, set the file name and storage destination of the sequence program and parameter to be executed. Step 2: Writing to standard ROM Using the GX Developer, write the sequence program and parameter to the standard ROM. Step 3: Setting the switch of the QCPU Using the DIP switch of the QCPU, set the storage destination of parameter in the standard ROM. Step 4: Executing the program Reset with the RESET/L.CLR switch. The operation starts with the BOOT LED lit. 7 - 55 8 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 8 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 8 8.1 Q Series External Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions H H1 H2 W2 W1 W D Unit: mm (inch) Base unit Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B QA65B H 98 (3.86) 130 (5.12) 250 (9.84) Dimensions W 114 (4.49) 142 (5.59) 197.5 (7.78) 189 (7.44) 245 (9.65) 328 (12.92) 439 (17.30) 106 (4.17) 189 (7.44) 189 (7.44) 245 (9.65) 328 (12.92) 439 (17.30) 315 (12.41) 420 (16.55) 98*2 (3.86) 110*3 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 352 (13.86) 130*4 (5.12) 200 (7.87) D＊1 H1 80 (3.15) Dimensions for mounting H2 W1 101 (3.98) 129 (5.08) 184.5 (7.26) 169 (6.65) 224.5 (8.84) 308 (12.13) 7 419 (16.50) (0.28) 83.5 (3.29) 167 (6.57) 167 (6.57) 222.5 (8.76) 306 (12.05) 417 (16.42) 295 (11.61) 10 (0.39) 400 (15.75) 25 (0.98) W2 8.5 (0.33) 15.5 (0.61) 10 (0.39) 332 (13.07) *1 D (depth) varies depending on the module to be mounted. Therefore, confirm the external dimensions of each module. *2 For mounting Q series module of which depth is 90 mm. *3 For mounting AnS series module of which depth is 93.6 mm. *4 For mounting A series module of which depth is 121 mm. 8-1 8 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 8.2 Q Series External Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions when Mounted with the Upgrade Tool H H1 H2 D W2 W1 W Unit: mm (inch) Base adapter ERNT-AQB38 ERNT-AQB68 ERNT-AQB58 ERNT-AQB35 ERNT-AQB65 ERNT-AQB55 ERNT-AQB32 ERNT-AQB62 ERNT-AQB52 *1 H 240 (9.44) Dimensions W 480 (18.89) 466 (18.35) 411 (16.18) 382 (15.04) 352 (13.86) 297 (11.69) 247 (9.73) 238 (9.37) 183 (7.20) D＊1 166.2*2 (6.54) Dimensions for mounting H2 W1 W2 460 (18.11) 446 (17.56) 391 (15.39) 362 (14.25) 200 25 10 332 (13.07) (7.87) (0.98) (0.39) 277 (10.90) 227 (8.93) 218 (8.58) 163 (6.42) H1 D (depth) varies depending on the upgrade tool (Conversion adapter) to be used. Therefore, confirm the external dimensions of a upgrade adapter. *2 For using the upgrade tool (Conversion adapter) ERNT-AQTY22. The upgrade tool is manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. 8-2 MELSEC-A series unit A38B, A38HB A68B A58B A35B A65B A55B A32B A62B A52B 8 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 8.3 A Series External Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions H H1 H2 W2 W1 W D Unit: mm (inch) Base unit A32B A32B-S1 A35B A38B A38HB A38HBEU A32RB A33RB A37RHB A52B A55B A58B A62B A65B A68B A68RB *1 H 250 Dimensions W 247 (9.72) 268 (10.56) 382 (15.04) 480 (18.90) 480 (18.90) 480 (18.90) 494 (19.45) 570 (22.44) 497 (19.57) 183 (7.20) 297 (11.69) 411 (16.18) 238 (9.37) 352 (13.86) 466 (18.35) 522 (20.55) D＊1 H1 130*2 (5.12) 200 (7.87) Dimensions for mounting H2 W1 227 (8.94) 248 (9.76) 362 (14.25) 460 (18.11) 460 (18.11) 460 (18.11) 474 (18.66) 550 (21.65) 25 (0.98) 477 (18.78) 163 (6.42) 277 (10.91) 391 (15.39) 218 (8.58) 332 (13.07) 446 (17.56) 502 (19.76) W2 10 (0.39) D (depth) varies depending on the module to be mounted. Therefore, confirm the external dimensions of each module to be mounted. *2 For mounting A series module of which depth is 121 mm. 8-3 APPENDICES APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 Basic Model QCPU Basic model QCPU is the best module to realize the cost effectiveness for a small-scale system. For a large-scale system, consider applying a high performance model QCPU, which allows you fewer restrictions. Appendix 1.1 Major Restrictions When the Basic model QCPU is compared to the High Performance model QCPU, the major restrictions are listed in the following. (1) Program (a) The maximum program capacity is 14K steps (when Q01CPU is selected). (b) Program number is limited to 1 respectively for the sequence program (program name: MAIN) and for the SFC program (program name: MAIN - SFC). (c) If SFC program has 128th block or later when it is converted, the SFC program is entirely deleted without being converted. (2) Device (a) File resister (R) cannot be set for Q00JCPU. Also, for Q00 and Q01CPU, up to 32K points × 2blocks can be set. (b) The maximum timer (T)/counter (C) device points are respectively 512. Devices over the maximum points are converted to SM999. (c) The maximum latch relay (L) device points are 2048. Devices over the maximum points are converted to SM999. (3) Comments (a) Only comments for each program (MAIN) are converted when the program is replaced. App - 1 APPENDICES (4) System configuration (a) Number of I/O points, extension base unit number, and module number are shown in the following table. Q00JCPU Number of I/O points Number of extension base units Number of loaded modules Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU (Reference) 256 1024 4096 2 units (MAX.) 4 units (MAX.) 7 units (MAX.) 16 modules (MAX.) 24 modules (MAX.) 64 modules (MAX.) Memory card Not available. (Number of slots) 1 slot (b) When configurated using the Basic model QCPU, only Q series modules must be used for all the modules. Connections of QA1S6 B and QA6 B base units are not compliant with the specification, and therefore the I/O and special modules of A series cannot be used. (c) Number of network modules is shown in the following table. Q00JCPU MELSECNET/H Q00CPU Q01CPU 1 module (only PLC to PLC network is available, remote I/O network is not available) Q02CPU (Reference) 4 modules Ethernet 1 module 4 modules CC-Link 1 module 4 modules App - 2 APPENDICES Appendix 1.2 CPU Module Specifications Comparisons Function Control method I/O control method Contents A/QnA series A2CCPU AnNCPU AnACPU AnUCPU QnACPU r *3 r *3 r *3 Repetitive operation of stored program Refresh mode/Direct mode r *1 *2 Language dedicated to Programming sequence control (Relay language symbol, Logic symbol, MELSAP language) Processing speed Watchdog timer (WDT) Memory capacity Sequence instructions (µs/step) Watchdog timer (WDT) (ms) 1.0 0.15 0.15 0.075 10 to 2000 10 to 2000 200 200 5 to 2000 32K Max. 448K Max. 768K Max. 1024K (Built-in (Memory cas- (Memory cas- (Memory cas- RAM) sette) sette) sette) Max. 8K Max. 30K × 2 Max. 30K × 2 Max. 30K × 4 Max. 124K Max. 14K Max. 58K × × × 512 256 to 2048 512 to 2048 512 to 4096 512 to 4096 Input device (X) (points) *5 512 256 to 2048 512 to 2048 8192 8192 Output device (Y) (points) *5 512 256 to 2048 512 to 2048 8192 8192 Total 2048 Total 2048 Total 8192 Total 8192 User memory capacity (bytes) Sequence program (steps) Program capacity 1.25 Microcomputer program (bytes) Number of Number of I/O points (points) occupied I/O points *4 Step relay (S) (points) No. of device points 8192 8192 *6 Annunciator (F) (points) 256 256 2048 2048 Edge relay (V) (points) × × × × 2048 Link relay (B) (points) 1024 1024 4096 8192 8192 Timer (T) (points) 256 256 2048 2048 2048 Counter (C) (points) 256 256 1024 1024 1024 Data register (D) (points) 1024 1024 6144 8192 12287 Link register (W) (points) 1024 1024 4096 8192 8192 File register (R) (points) 4096 8192 8192 8192 32768 Accumulater (A) (points) 2 2 2 2 × (Z) (points) 1 1 7 7 16 (V) (points) 1 1 7 7 × Nesting (N) (points) 8 8 8 8 15 Pointer (P) (points) 256 256 256 256 4096 Special relay (M) (points) 256 256 256 256 2048 Special register (D) (points) 256 256 256 256 Index register Comment points (SRAM card) 8192 Internal relay (M) (points) Latch relay (L) (points) Max. 2036K × 2 Comment points (points) *7 Max. 1600 Max. 4032 Max. 4032 Max. 4032 2048 2048 Max. approx. 50K Watchdog timer (WDT), Self-diagnostics Memory error detection, CPU error detection, Battery error detection, etc. Operation mode at error occurrence App - 3 Stop/Continue setting Output mode Re-output operation status switching at before STOP/Selection of changing from output after operation STOP to RUN execution *1 Only refresh I/O is available. *2 Direct I/O is also selectable with the DIP switch. *3 Basically, only the refresh mode is applicable, but some instructions/devices can be input/output in the direct mode. *4 This number means the number of applicable points for the access to actual I/O modules. *5 This number means the number of useable points on the program. *6 The step relays (S) of the QnA and Q series are dedicated to the SFC. *7 Comment points are the points that can be written to CPU. APPENDICES : Usable, r: Not usable, ×: Partially different in spec. (e.g. setting method) Q series Basic model Q00JCPU Q00CPU Precaution for replacement Q01CPU – r *3 r *3 r *3 Use direct I/O instructions to input/output in the direct mode, as the Q series supports the refresh mode only. The MELSAP language for QnA/Q series supports is MELSAP3 and that for A series is MELSAP-II. 0.2 0.16 0.1 – 10 to 2000 10 to 2000 10 to 2000 – Max. 58K Max. 94K Max. 94K Max. 8K Max. 8K Max. 14K A memory cassette is required for the A series as user memory, while the user memory is included in the Q series as standard equipment. – The AnA, AnU, QnA and Q series do not include microcomputer program. Therefore, × × × 256 1024 1024 – 2048 2048 2048 – 2048 2048 2048 – 8192 8192 8192 – 2048 2048 2048 – 2048 *6 2048 *6 2048 *6 – 1024 1024 1024 – 1024 1024 1024 – 2048 2048 2048 – 512 512 512 – 512 512 512 – 11136 11136 11136 – consider use of the sequence program, etc. as the substitution. 2048 2048 2048 – × 32768 32768 The Q00JCPU does not have file registers. × × × 10 10 10 × × × 15 15 15 – 300 300 300 – 1024 1024 1024 – 1024 1024 1024 – Max. 1400 Max. 2300 Max. 2300 – Accumulators are converted to the special registers (SD718, SD719) upon A Q program conversion as they are not included in the QnA and Q series. This is used as an edge relay for the QnA and Q series. – – – App - 4 APPENDICES Appendix 1.3 CPU Module Functional Comparisons (1) Functional comparisons between A2CCPU, AnNCPU and Q Series CPU : Usable r: Not usable ×: Partially different in spec. (e.g. setting method) A series Function Contents Q series Basic model A2C AnN Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU r r r Executes the sequence program Constant scan Precaution for replacement Set this function with the special register at constant time intervals regardless of the processing time (D9020) for A series, and with parameters for Q series Basic model. of the program. Holds the data of devices when Latch (power turning OFF the power, resetting, backup) and a momentary power failure – longer than 20ms occurs. Remote RUN/ STOP PAUSE Executes the remote RUN/STOP – using the external switches and peripheral devices. Stops operations while holding the – output status. For A series, an interrupt program is Interrupt processing required for each main program and Executes the program that corresponds to the cause when an r r r interrupt cause occurs. sub-program separately. For Q series Basic model, create only one interrupt program to share between the two programs. Executes various controls and operations over utility programs Microcomputer mode and user created microcomputer × programs stored in the × × microcomputer program area by Consider use of sequence program, etc., as the substitution. Control calling them from the sequence program. Display of The settings for ON/OFF of priority of ERROR LED at the occurrence of ERROR LED error. Target errors vary for each module, but × there is no functional differences. When performing ROM operation in the Enables operation with Q series Basic model, use the boot run parameters and programs stored ROM operation in ROMs in order not to lose user r r r programs due to battery function to read the sequence programs stored in the standard ROM built in the CPU or memory card into the program exhaustion. memory built in the CPU. Data protection function Prohibits peripheral devices from The Q series Basic model prohibits (System reading/writing to programs and each file from being read/written by protect, comments in the memory Keyword cassettes, the memory card, and registration/ built-in memory, etc. of a CPU programs from being read/written to the Password module. user memory by keyword registration. r r r password registration, whereas the A series prohibits the parameters and registration) The settings of output status at changing from STOP to RUN The settings for the output status at changing from STOP to RUN In case of transition from the A series, it (Y) between "re-output operation is necessary to re-set the parameters. status before STOP" and "output after operation execution". Q CPU includes a clock, of which The Q series Basic model handles the data can be read and written. The Clock function clock data consists of year, month, date, hour, minute, second and a day of the week. App - 5 *1 r r r four digits of the year (western calendar), whereas the A series handles only the last two digits. APPENDICES : Usable r: Not usable ×: Partially different in spec. (e.g. setting method) A series Function Contents Write during Changes (writes to) the program RUN of a CPU in the RUN mode. Q series Basic model A2C AnN Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Precaution for replacement For the Q series Basic model, it is *2 *2 *2 × × × × × × × × × necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. Stores the data of all devices in the memory cassette or memory Status latch card at the occurrence of an error *3 for monitoring by the peripheral The Q series Basic model does not include the status latch function. device. Debug Stores the data of specified devices at the specified intervals Sampling trace for monitoring by the peripheral *3 device to check the change of The Q series Basic model does not include the sampling trance function. device status. Step operation (skip operation Stops the execution of a sequence partial program at the specified step. The Q series Basic model does not × Consider the debug with GX Simulator. operation) Skips the devices used for OUT Off-line switch instruction in the operation × × × × × × processing of sequence program. Maintenance Online I/O module replacement Self-diagnostic function Enables I/O modules to be replace while the CPU is in RUN include the step operation function. The Q series Basic model does not include the off-line switch function. The Q series Basic model does not × Executes self-diagnostics to check for errors and stop a CPU, etc. include the online I/O module replacement function. Error codes differ between the A series and Q series Basic model. *1 Only A2CCPU24 (-PRF) is applicable. A2CJCPU-S3 and A2CCPU (P21/R21) are not. *2 It is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. (Default-set to 500 steps.) *3 The A1NCPU (P21/R21) is not applicable. App - 6 APPENDICES (2) Functional comparisons between AnACPU, AnUCPU and Q series CPU : Usable r: Not usable ×: Partially different in spec. (e.g. setting method) A series Function Contents Q series Basic model AnA AnU Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Executes the sequence program Constant scan at constant time intervals regardless of the processing time Precaution for replacement Set this function with the special register r r r of the program. (D9020) for the A series, and with parameters for the Q series Basic model. Holds the data of devices when Latch (power turning OFF the power, resetting, backup) and a momentary power failure – longer than 20ms occurs. Remote RUN/ STOP PAUSE Executes the remote RUN/STOP using the external switches and – peripheral devices Stops operations while holding the – output status. For A series, an interrupt program is Interrupt processing required for each main program and Executes the program that corresponds to the cause when an r r r interrupt cause occurs. sub-program separately. For Q series Basic model, create only one interrupt program to share between the two programs. The settings for ON/OFF of priority of ERROR LED at the occurrence of ERROR LED error. Control Display of Target errors vary for each module, but there is no functional differences. When performing ROM operation in the Enables operation with Q series Basic model, use the boot run parameters and programs stored ROM operation in ROMs in order not to lose user r r r programs due to battery function to read the sequence programs stored in the standard ROM built in the CPU or memory card into the program exhaustion. memory built in the CPU. Data protection function Prohibits peripheral devices from The Q series Basic model prohibits (System reading/writing to programs and each file from being read/written by protect, comments in the memory Keyword cassettes, the memory card, and registration/ built-in memory, etc. of a CPU programs from being read/written to the Password module. user memory by keyword registration. r r r password registration, whereas the A series prohibits the parameters and registration) The settings of output status at changing from STOP to RUN The settings for the output status at changing from STOP to RUN Resetting parameters is required to (Y) between "re-output operation replace the QnA series with the Q status before STOP" and "output series Basic model. after operation execution". Q CPU includes a clock, of which The Q series Basic model handles the data can be read and written. The Clock function clock data consists of year, month, date, hour, minute, second and a day of the week. App - 7 r r r four digits of the year (western calendar), whereas the A series handles only the last two digits. APPENDICES : Usable r: Not usable ×: Partially different in spec. (e.g. setting method) A series Function Contents Write during Changes (writes to) the program RUN of a CPU in the RUN mode. Q series Basic model AnA AnU Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Precaution for replacement For the Q series Basic model, it is *1 *1 *1 × × × × × × × × × necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. Stores the data of all devices in the memory cassette or memory Status latch card at the occurrence of an error for monitoring by the peripheral The Q series Basic model does not include the status latch function. Debug device. Stores the data of specified devices at the specified intervals Sampling trace for monitoring by the peripheral device to check the change of The Q series Basic model does not include the sampling trance function. device status. Step operation (skip operation Stops the execution of a sequence partial program at the specified step. The Q series Basic model does not Consider the debug with GX Simulator. Maintenance operation) Online I/O Enables I/O modules to be module replaced while the CPU is in the replacement RUN Self-diagnostics function Error history *1 Executes self-diagnostics to check for errors and stops a CPU, etc. include the step operation function. The Q series Basic model does not × × × include the online I/O module replacement function. Error codes differ between the A series and Q series Basic model. Stores errors detected by the Error codes differ between the A series diagnostics function into the CPU. and Q series Basic model. The latest 16 Error details can be monitored points are stored in the error history with the peripheral devices. storage memory. It is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. (Default-set to 500 steps.) App - 8 APPENDICES (3) Functional comparisons between QnACPU and Q series CPU : Usable r: Not usable ×: Partially different in spec. (e.g. setting method) QnA Function Contents series Q series Basic model QnA Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU CPU CPU CPU Precaution for replacement Executes the sequence program at Constant scan the constant time intervals regardless – of the processing time of the program. Holds the data of devices when Latch (power turning OFF the power, resetting, and backup) a momentary power failure longer – than 20ms occurs. Remote RUN/ STOP PAUSE Executes the remote RUN/STOP – using the external switches and peripheral devices. Stops operations while holding the – output status. For A series, an interrupt program is Interrupt processing required for each main program and sub- Executes the program that corresponds to the cause when an r r r program separately. For Q series, create only one interrupt program to share interrupt cause occurs. between the two programs. Display priority The settings for ON/OFF of ERROR Target errors vary for each model, but there of ERROR LED LED at the occurrence of error. are no functional differences. File management Manages all of parameters, Only one file can be created for each file. sequence programs, device comments, file registers, etc. as files. Control Selects a suitable execution type for Structured program application, and divides program each program by designer, process I/O assignment For the Q series Basic model, only one × × × type to "Scan". Performs the I/O assignments to any When using a base unit with other than 8 individual module regardless of its r r r parameter (I/O assignment setting). Executes the sequence program after For the Q series Basic model, the boot run operation) the CPU built-in memory when the r r r registration/ Password registration) built in the CPU but not with the memory The Q series prohibits each file from being Prohibits peripheral devices from read/written by password registration, reading/writing to programs and comments in the memory cassettes, can be executed with the standard ROM card. CPU goes to RUN mode. protect, Keyword slots, set the number of slots with the mounted position. reading it from the memory card to function (System respectively available. Set all execution or others. Boot run (ROM Data protection ladder program and SFC program is r r r the memory card, and built-in whereas the QnA series prohibits the parameters and programs from being read/ written to the user memory by keyword memory, etc. of a CPU module. registration. Sets the default value into the device Device default memory, file register, special function value module, etc. when the CPU is – changing from STOP to RUN. The settings of output status at changing from STOP to RUN The settings for the output status at changing from STOP to RUN (Y) Resetting parameters is required to replace between "re-output operation status the QnA series with the Q series Basic before STOP" and "output after model. operation execution". Number of Sets the number of general data general data processing executed in one END processing operation For the Q series Basic model, use COM r r r The Q series Basic model handles the four can be read/written. The clock data consists of year, month, day, hour, minute, second and a day of the week. App - 9 reserved time with special register (SD315) if necessary. Q CPU incorporates a clock, which Clock function instructions or set the communication r r r digits of the year (western calendar), whereas the A series handles only the last two digits. APPENDICES : Usable r: Not usable ×: Partially different in spec. (e.g. setting method) QnA Function Contents Write during Changes (writes to) the program of a RUN CPU in the RUN mode series Q series Basic model QnA Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU CPU CPU CPU Precaution for replacement For the Q series Basic model, it is *1 *1 *1 *1 × × × × × × × × × × × × necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. Stores the data of all devices in the Status latch memory cassette or memory card at the occurrence of an error for The Q series does not include the status latch function. monitoring by the peripheral device. Stores the data of specified device at Sampling trace the specified intervals for monitoring by the peripheral device. *2 Collects the execution status of Program trace specified programs and steps, and stores them in a file. *2 *3 Debug Detaches I/O modules or special Simulation modules from the CPU module and function test-operates the program when *3 partial program at the specified step. The Q series Basic model does not include the program trace function. the simulation function. Consider the debug with GX Simulator. Step operation Stops the execution of a sequence the sampling trace function. The Q series Basic model does not include executing the step operation. (Skip operation The Q series Basic model does not include The Q series Basic model does not include × × × the step operation function. Consider the debug with GX Simulator. operation) Execution time measurement (Program list Measures the operation time for each monitor, scan program. – time measurement) Module access Monitors the access interval time of interval time special function modules or reading peripheral devices. Online I/O module Maintenance replacement Self-diagnostics Enables I/O modules to be replaced while the CPU is RUN. × × × × × The Q series Basic module does not include this function. The Q series Basic module does not include the online I/O module replacement function. Executes self-diagnostics to check Error codes differ between the A series and for errors and stops a CPU, etc. Q series Basic model. Stores errors, detected by the diagnostics function into the CPU or Error history × memory card. The stored history can be monitored with the peripheral devices. Error codes differ between the A series and Q series Basic model. The latest 16 points are stored in the error history storage memory. *1 It is necessary to set the reserved capacity for the write during RUN in advance. (Default-set to 500 steps.) *2 The SRAM card is required. *3 GPPQ is required. This is not applicable to GX Developer. App - 10 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Spare parts storage (1) The general specifications of PLCs are as follows. Please do not store spare parts under a high temperature or high humidity condition, even within the range guaranteed by the specifications. Storage ambient temperature -20 to 75 Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90%, no condensation (2) Store in a place avoiding direct sunlight. (3) Store under a condition with no dust or corrosive gas. (4) The battery capacity of a A6BAT battery or a lithium-coin battery (commercially available) for memory card will be decreased by its self-discharging even when it is not used. Replace it with new one in 5 years as a guideline. (5) For a power supply module, CPU module with built-in power supply, or analog module that uses any aluminum electrolytic capacitor, which is indicated in the table below, take the following measures since the characteristics will be deteriorated when the aluminum electrolytic capacitor is left un-energized for a long time. Model Product CPU module A1NCPU, A1NCPUP21, A1NCPUR21, A1NCPUP21-S3, A2CCPU, (Power supply built-in type) A2CCPUP21, A2CCPUR21, A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF, A2CJCPU-S3 Power supply module Analog module A61P, A61PEU, A61P-UL, A62P, A62PEU, A63P, A68P, A61RP, A67RP, A2CJ66P A62DA, A62DA-S1 [Countermeasures for preventing aluminum electrolytic capacitor characteristics deterioration] Apply the rated voltage to the aluminum electrolytic capacitor for several hours to activate it. Or, rotate products at the periodic inspection (in every 1 to 2 years). [Reference] The life of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor, even if not used, under a normal temperature decreases approximately at 1/4 speed of the case when it is energized. App - 11 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Related Manuals Appendix 3.1 Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook No. 1 2 3 4 Manual Name Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals) Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules) Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Network Modules) Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Communications) Manual Number Model Code L-08043ENG – L-08046ENG – L-08048ENG – L-08050ENG – Appendix 3.2 A/QnA Series No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Manual Name MELSEC-A/QnA Catalog MELSEC-A/QnA Data Book Type A1N/A2N (S1) / A3NCPU User's Manual Type A2A (S1) / A3ACPU User's Manual Type A2U (S1) / A3U/A4UCPU User's Manual Q2A CPU (S1) / Q3ACPU/Q4ACPU User’s Manual Type A2CCPU (P21/R21) , A2CCPU-DC24V, A2CCPUC24 (-PRF) , A2CJCPU User's Manual Type ACPU/QCPU-A (A Mode) (Fundamentals) Programming Manual Type ACPU/QCPU-A (A Mode) (Common Instructions) Programming Manual Type AnSHCPU/AnACPU/AnUCPU/QCPU-A (A Mode) Programming Manual (Dedicated Instructions) Type AnACPU/AnUCPU/QCPU-A (A mode) Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions) Type MELSAP-II(SFC) Programming Manual QnACPU Programming Manual (Fundamentals) QnACPU Programming Manual (Special Function Module) QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions) QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions) QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC) I/O module type Building block User’s Manual A/D converter module type A68AD User's Manual A/D converter module type A68AD-S2 User's Manual Analog-Digital Converter Module type A68ADN User's Manual Analog-Digital Converter Module type A616AD User's Manual D/A converter module type A62DA User's Manual D/A converter module type A62DA-S1 User's Manual Digital-Analog Converter Module type A68DAV/DAI(S1) User's Manual Digital-Analog Converter Module type A616DAV User's Manual Digital-Analog Converter Module type A616DAI User's Manual Pt100 input module type A68RD3/4 User's Manual Type A68RD3N/4N, A1S62RD3N/4N Pt100 Input Module User's Manual Temperature-Digital Converter Module type A616TD User's Manual High speed counter module type AD61-S1 User's Manual Positioning module type AD70 User's Manual Positioning Module Type AD72 User's Manual Manual Number L-08033E L-08029E IB-66543 IB-66544 IB-66436 IB-66608 Model Code – – 13JE83 13JE84 13JE25 13J821 IB-66545 13JE85 IB-66249 13J740 IB-66250 13J741 IB-66251 13J742 IB-66258 13J744 IB-66361 IB-66614 SH-4013 SH-080039 SH-080040 SH-080041 IB-66140 IB-66054 IB-66213 IB-66307 IB-66171 IB-66053 IB-66177 IB-66285 IB-66172 IB-66173 IB-66308 SH-080193 IB-66174 IB-66052 IB-66309 IB-66095 13JF40 13JF46 13JF56 13JF58 13JF59 13JF60 13J643 13J607 13J647 13J668 13J645 13J608 13J648 13J667 13J650 13J651 13J670 13JR46 13J654 13J610 13J663 13J622 App - 12 APPENDICES No. 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Manual Name A1SD75P1-S3/P2-S3/P3-S3,AD75P1-S3/P2-S3/P3-S3 Positioning Module User's Manual Positioning module type A1SD75M/M2/M3, AD75M1/M2/M3 User's Manual Type MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B Data Link System Reference Manual Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual For A Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual Computer Link Module (Com.link func./Print. func.) User's Manual Serial Communications Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version) Intelligent Communication Module type AD51-S3 User's Manual Intelligent communication module type AD51H-S3 User's Manual MELSECNET/MINI-S3 Master Module Type AJ71PT32-S3, AJ71T32-S3, A1SJ71PT32-S3, A1SJ71T32-S3 User's Manual MELSEC-I/O Link Remote I/O System Master Module type AJ51T64/ A1SJ51T64 User's Manual Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual Positioning Module Type AD71(S1/S2/S7)/A1SD71-S2(S7) User's Manual PC fault detection module type AS91, A1SS91, A0J2-S91 User's Manual Manual Number Model Code IB-66716 13J871 IB-66715 IB-66350 13J870 13JF70 IB-66721 13J872 SH-080192 SH-080146 SH-3511 13JR45 13JR33 13JF77 SH-66612 13J825 IB-66189 IB-66401 13J655 13JE16 SH-66565 13JE64 SH-66574 13J748 IB-66440 13JE33 IB-66690 13JF78 IB-66722 13J873 IB-66563 IB-66626 13JE98 13J828 Appendix 3.3 Q Series No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 App - 13 Manual Name Manual Number MELSEC-Q Catalog L-08033E MELSEC-Q Data Book L-08029E QCPU User's Manual(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) SH-080483ENG QCPU User's Manual(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) SH-080484ENG QA65B Extension Base Unit User's Manual IB-0800158 QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions) SH-080039 QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions) SH-080040 QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC) SH-080041 I/O Module Type Building Block User's Manual SH-080042 Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual Q64AD/Q68ADV/Q68ADI/ SH-080055 GX Configurator-AD Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter Module (With SH-080277 Signal Conditioning Function) User's Manual Digital-Analog Converter Module User's Manual SH-080054 Channel Isolated Digital-Analog Converter Module User's Manual SH-080281E Temperature Control Module User's Manual SH-080121 Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple/Micro Voltage SH-080141 Input Module User's Manual RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User's Manual SH-080142 High-Speed Counter Module User's Manual SH-080036 Channel Isolated Pulse Input Module User's Manual SH-080313E Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning Module User's Manual SH-080058 Type QD70 Positioning Module User's Manual SH-080171 User’s Manual Type QD75M Positioning Module (Details) IB-0300062 Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual SH-080049 (PLC to PLC network) Model Code – – 13JP73 13JP74 13JR26 13JF58 13JF59 13JF60 13JL99 13JR03 13JR51 13JR02 13JR52 13JR21 13JR30 13JR31 13JL95 13JR54 13JR09 13JR39 ICT752 13JF92 APPENDICES No. 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Manual Name Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O network) CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic) Q Corresponding Intelligent Communication Module User's Manual FL-net(OPCN-2) Interface Module User's Manual AS-i Master module type A1SJ71AS92 User's Manual Manual Number Model Code SH-080124 13JF96 SH-080394E SH-080009 SH-080006 SH-080089 SH-080350E SH-080085 13JR64 13JL88 13JL86 13JR16 13JR61 13JR15 Appendix 3.4 Programming Tool No. 1 2 3 4 Manual Name GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (SFC) GX Simulator Version 6 Operating Manual Type SW4IVD-GPPA (GPP) Operating Manual Manual Number SH-080373E SH-080374E SH-080169 IB-66855 Model Code 13JU41 13JU42 13JU17 13JL62 Appendix 3.5 Related Catalog Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. No. 1 Catalog name Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller Upgrade Tool Catalog Namber SAN C033E·04Z App - 14 APPENDICES Memo App - 15 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product. 1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. [Gratis Warranty Term] The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. [Gratis Warranty Range] (1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product. (2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases. 1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design. 2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided. 4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced. 5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. 6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user. 2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued. 3. Overseas service Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ. 4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks. 5. Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice. 6. Product application (1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault. (2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications. In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications. However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at the users discretion. Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox. Co., Ltd in the United States. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE German Branch Gothaer Straße 8 D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 MITSUBISHIELECTRICEUROPEB.V.-org.sl. CZECH REP. Czech Branch Avenir Business Park, Radlická 714/113a CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE French Branch 25, Boulevard des Bouvets F-92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Irish Branch Westgate Business Park, Ballymount IRL-Dublin 24 Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Italian Branch Viale Colleoni 7 I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MB) Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND Poland Branch Krakowska 50 PL-32-083 Balice Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. RUSSIA 52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor RU-115054 Мoscow Phone: +7 495 721-2070 Fax: +7 495 721-2071 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubí 76-80 E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131 Fax: +34 935891579 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK UK Branch Travellers Lane UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00 Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Office Tower “Z” 14 F 8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku Tokyo 104-6212 Phone: +81 3 622 160 60 Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Fax: +1 847 478 22 53 GEVA AUSTRIA Wiener Straße 89 AT-2500 Baden Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 TEHNIKON BELARUS Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off. 703-711 BY-220030 Minsk Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION BELGIUM Culliganlaan 3 BE-1831 Diegem Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30 Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31 Koning & Hartman b.v. BELGIUM Woluwelaan 31 BE-1800 Vilvoorde Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 INEA BH d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Aleja Lipa 56 BA-71000 Sarajevo Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164 Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539 AKHNATON BULGARIA 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd. Pb 21 BG-1756 Sofia Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6044 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 INEA CR d.o.o. CROATIA Losinjska 4 a HR-10000 Zagreb Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 AutoCont C.S. s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC Technologická 374/6 CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec Phone: +420 595 691 150 Fax: +420 595 691 199 Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK Lykkegårdsvej 17 DK-4000 Roskilde Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ ESTONIA Pärnu mnt.160i EE-11317 Tallinn Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Peltoie 37 FIN-28400 Ulvila Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 540 Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 541 UTECO GREECE 5, Mavrogenous Str. GR-18542 Piraeus Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 MELTRADE Kft. HUNGARY Fertő utca 14. HU-1107 Budapest Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA Ritausmas iela 23 LV-1058 Riga Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA Savanoriu Pr. 187 LT-02300 Vilnius Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101 Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980 ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA 99, Paola Hill Malta- Paola PLA 1702 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA bld. Traian 23/1 MD-2060 Kishinev Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280 HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V. NETHERLANDS Wolweverstraat 22 NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +31 (0)180 – 46 60 04 Fax: +31 (0)180 – 44 23 55 Koning & Hartman b.v. NETHERLANDS Haarlerbergweg 21-23 NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05 Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Postboks 487 NO-3002 Drammen Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77 Fonseca S.A. PORTUGAL R. João Francisco do Casal 87/89 PT - 3801-997 Aveiro, Esgueira Phone: +351 (0)234 / 303 900 Fax: +351 (0)234 / 303 910 Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3 RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02 Craft Con. & Engineering d.o.o. SERBIA Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80-86 SER-18106 Nis Phone:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5 Fax: +381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5 INEA SR d.o.o. SERBIA Izletnicka 10 SER-113000 Smederevo Phone: +381 (0)26 / 617 163 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 617 163 SIMAP s.r.o. SLOVAKIA Jána Derku 1671 SK-911 01 Trencín Phone: +421 (0)32 743 04 72 Fax: +421 (0)32 743 75 20 PROCONT, spol. s r.o. Prešov SLOVAKIA Kúpelná 1/A SK-080 01 Prešov Phone: +421 (0)51 7580 611 Fax: +421 (0)51 7580 650 INEA d.o.o. SLOVENIA Stegne 11 SI-1000 Ljubljana Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8100 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170 Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 SE-20124 Malmö Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 93 23 01 Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND Im Schörli 5 CH-8600 Dübendorf Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28 GTS TURKEY Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5 TR-34775 Yukarı Dudullu-Ümraniye-İSTANBUL Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995 CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St. UA-02660 Kiev Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66 EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES TOO Kazpromavtomatika Ul. Zhambyla 28 KAZ-100017 Karaganda Phone: +7 7212 / 50 10 00 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50 KAZAKHSTAN MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761 TEXEL ELECTRONICS Ltd. ISRAEL 2 Ha´umanut, P.O.B. 6272 IL-42160 Netanya Phone: +972 (0)9 / 863 39 80 Fax: +972 (0)9 / 885 24 30 CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA Lebanon - Beirut Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd. Private Bag 2016 ZA-1600 Isando Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0770 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0761 SOUTH AFRICA Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// [email protected] /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com